Dự án điện gió Liên Lập Quảng Trị

Initial Environmental Examination
June 2021
Viet Nam: Lotus Wind Power Project

Main Report – Part 1 of 3
Prepared by ERM Vietnam for the Asian Development Bank. This is an updated version of the
draft originally posted in March 2021 available on http://www.adb.org/projects/54211-
001/documents.
This initial environmental examination is a document of the borrower. The views expressed herein
do not necessarily represent those of ADB's Board of Directors, Management, or staff, and may
be preliminary in nature. Your attention is directed to the “terms of use” section on ADB’s website.
In preparing any country program or strategy, financing any project, or by making any designation
of or reference to a particular territory or geographic area in this document, the Asian
Development Bank does not intend to make any judgments as to the legal or other status of any
territory or area.
Initial Environmental and
Social Examination Report
Lien Lap Wind Power Project, Huong Hoa
District, Quang Tri Province
14 May 2021
Project No.: 0552758
Power Construction JSC No. 1
The business of sustainability

Document details
Document title Initial Environmental and Social Examination Report

Document subtitle Lien Lap Wind Power Project, Huong Hoa District, Quang Tri Province
Project No. 0552758

Date 14 May 2021
Version Final
Author ERM Team
Client Name Power Construction JSC No. 1
Document history
Version Revision Author Reviewed by ERM approval to issue Comments
Name Date
Draft 0.0 ERM Team TL HP 28.07.2020 Approved for
Issuance
Issuance
Issuance
Issuance
Issuance
Issuance
Issuance
Final ERM Team TL HP 17.03.2021 Approved for
Issuance
Final 1.0 ERM Team TL HP 26.03.2021 Approved for
Issuance
Final 2.0 ERM Team TL HP 14.05.2021 Approved for
Issuance
www.erm.com Version: Final 14 May 2021

Project No.: 0552758 Client: Power Construction JSC No. 1
Signature Page
14 May 2021
Initial Environmental and Social Examination

Report
Lien Lap Wind Power Project, Huong Hoa District, Quang Tri Province
Hai Pham
Partner-in-Charge
ERM Vietnam
3rd Floor, Saigon Finance Centre
09 Dinh Tien Hoang, Dakao Ward
District 1, Ho Chi Minh City
Vietnam
© Copyright 2021 by ERM Worldwide Group Ltd and / or its affiliates (“ERM”).
All rights reserved. No part of this work may be reproduced or transmitted in any form,
or by any means, without the prior written permission of ERM

INITIAL ENVIRONMENTAL AND SOCIAL EXAMINATION REPORT CONTENTS
CONTENTS
EXECUTIVE SUMMARY ...................................................................................................................... 22
1. INTRODUCTION ........................................................................................................................ 31
1.1 Purpose of this Report ................................................................................................................. 31
1.2 Project Background ..................................................................................................................... 31
1.3 Environmental and Social Impact Assessment Objective ............................................................ 34
1.4 Scope of Baseline and Impact Assessment ................................................................................. 34
1.5 Structure of the IESE ................................................................................................................... 35
2. PROJECT DESCRIPTION ......................................................................................................... 37

2.1 Project Alternatives ...................................................................................................................... 37
2.1.1 No Project Scenario .................................................................................................... 37
2.1.2 Alternatives Methods of Power Generation ................................................................. 40
2.1.3 Wind Turbines Layout Alternative ............................................................................... 43
2.2 Project Location ........................................................................................................................... 44
2.2.1 Wind Turbine Layout ................................................................................................... 48
2.2.2 35/110 kV Huong Tan Substation ............................................................................... 48
2.2.3 35 kV Transmission Line ............................................................................................. 48
2.3 Project Schedule.......................................................................................................................... 49
2.4 Project Facilities and Components .............................................................................................. 50
2.4.1 Permanent Facilities ................................................................................................... 52
2.4.2 Ancillary Facilities ....................................................................................................... 54
2.4.3 Other Components...................................................................................................... 58
2.4.4 Shared Facilities ......................................................................................................... 58
2.5 Project Activities .......................................................................................................................... 60
2.5.1 Pre-construction Activities ........................................................................................... 60
2.5.2 Construction Activities ................................................................................................. 60
2.5.3 Operation and Maintenance ........................................................................................ 65
2.5.4 Decommissioning Phase ............................................................................................ 66
2.6 Unplanned Events ....................................................................................................................... 66
2.7 Project Management .................................................................................................................... 66
2.8 Employment ................................................................................................................................. 66
2.8.1 Construction ................................................................................................................ 66
2.8.2 Operation .................................................................................................................... 67
3. ADMINISTRATIVE FRAMEWORK ............................................................................................ 68

3.1 Overview ...................................................................................................................................... 68
3.2 Regulatory Frameworks in Vietnam ............................................................................................. 68
3.2.1 Law on Environmental Protection ............................................................................... 68
3.2.2 Environmental Regulations/ Standards ....................................................................... 68
3.2.3 Environmental Impact Assessment ............................................................................. 69
3.2.4 Law on Forestry 2017 and Law on Biodiversity 2008 .................................................. 71
3.2.5 National Regulations on Land Acquisition, Compensation, Support and
Resettlement ............................................................................................................... 71
3.2.6 National Regulations on Electricity.............................................................................. 73
3.2.7 National Regulations on Grievances ........................................................................... 75
3.2.8 National regulations on Occupational Health and Safety (OHS) ................................. 75
3.2.9 National Regulations on Chemicals ............................................................................ 75
3.2.10 National Regulations on Fire Prevention and Fire Fighting ......................................... 75
3.2.11 Regulations on Labour Rights ..................................................................................... 76
3.2.12 National Regulations on Ethnic Minorities ................................................................... 76
3.3 International Regulatory Framework ............................................................................................ 76
3.3.1 Equator Principles III (2013) ....................................................................................... 76

3.3.2 ADB Safeguard Policy Statement ............................................................................... 77

3.3.3 ADB Social Protection Strategy (2001) ....................................................................... 81
3.3.4 ADB Gender and Development Policy (1998) ............................................................. 81
3.3.5 Access to Information Policy (2018)............................................................................ 82
3.3.6 ADB Accountability Mechanism Policy (2012) ............................................................ 82
3.3.7 JICA’s Environmental and Social Guidelines .............................................................. 82
3.3.8 IFC’s Performance Standards on Environmental and Social Sustainability (2012) ..... 83
3.3.9 World Bank General EHS Guidelines (2007) .............................................................. 83
3.3.10 IFC and EBRD’s Guidance Note on Workers’ Accommodation: Processes and
Standards ................................................................................................................... 84
3.4 International Conventions ............................................................................................................ 84
3.4.1 The Kyoto Protocol on Climate Change (UNFCC) ...................................................... 84
3.4.2 The United Nations Convention on Biodiversity 1992 ................................................. 84
3.4.3 The Basel Convention 1989 ........................................................................................ 85
3.4.4 International Union for Conservation of Natural and Natural Resources, Red List of
Threatened Species .................................................................................................... 85
3.4.5 The United Nations Declaration on the Rights of Indigenous Peoples ........................ 85
3.4.6 International Covenant on Economic, Cultural and Social Rights ............................... 85
3.4.7 The International Labour Organization’s Labor Standards .......................................... 85
4. IMPACT ASSESSMENT METHODOLOGY............................................................................... 87

4.1 Introduction .................................................................................................................................. 87
4.2 Screening..................................................................................................................................... 87
4.3 Scoping ........................................................................................................................................ 88
4.4 Project Description ....................................................................................................................... 88
4.5 Baseline Conditions ..................................................................................................................... 88
4.6 Stakeholder Engagement ............................................................................................................ 88
4.7 Impact Assessment (IA) ............................................................................................................... 88
4.7.1 Prediction of Impacts .................................................................................................. 89
4.7.2 Evaluation of Impacts.................................................................................................. 89
4.7.3 Identification of Mitigation and Enhancement Measures ............................................. 92
4.7.4 Residual Impact Evaluation ........................................................................................ 93
4.7.5 Management, Monitoring and Audit ............................................................................ 93
4.8 Cumulative Impact ....................................................................................................................... 93
4.9 Risk assessment for Unplanned Events ...................................................................................... 96
4.9.1 Assess the Scale of Consequence ............................................................................. 96
4.9.2 Assess the Likelihood ................................................................................................. 96
4.9.3 Assess the Significance .............................................................................................. 97
5. IESE SCREENING AND SCOPING ........................................................................................... 98

5.1 Screening Result ......................................................................................................................... 98
5.2 Scoping ...................................................................................................................................... 101
5.2.1 Scoping Results ........................................................................................................ 101
5.2.2 Project Area of Influence ........................................................................................... 103
5.2.3 Identification of Potential Impact ............................................................................... 107
6. STAKEHOLDER ENGAGEMENT............................................................................................ 110

6.1 Stakeholder Engagement during EIA Process ........................................................................... 110
6.2 Stakeholder Engagement during IESE Process ........................................................................ 110
6.2.1 Stakeholder Engagement in May 2020 ..................................................................... 110
6.2.2 Stakeholder Engagement in September 2020 .......................................................... 116
6.2.3 Stakeholder Engagement in November 2020 ........................................................... 116
6.2.4 Stakeholder Engagement in December 2020 ........................................................... 118
7. ENVIRONMENTAL BASELINE ............................................................................................... 122

7.1 Introduction ................................................................................................................................ 122

7.2 Climate and Meteorology ........................................................................................................... 122

7.2.1 Temperature ............................................................................................................. 123
7.2.2 Relative Humidity ...................................................................................................... 123
7.2.3 Evaporation ............................................................................................................... 124
7.2.4 Fog............................................................................................................................ 124
7.2.5 Sun Hours ................................................................................................................. 125
7.2.6 Wind Regime ............................................................................................................ 126
7.2.7 Rainfall ...................................................................................................................... 130
7.2.8 Natural Hazards ........................................................................................................ 130
7.3 Topography and Terrain ............................................................................................................ 133
7.4 Geology ..................................................................................................................................... 133
7.4.1 Geological Condition ................................................................................................. 133
7.4.2 Geotechnical Condition ............................................................................................. 134
7.5 Hydrology................................................................................................................................... 135
7.5.1 Hydrology in Quang Tri Province .............................................................................. 135
7.5.2 Hydrology in the Project Area ................................................................................... 135
7.6 Ambient Air Quality .................................................................................................................... 135
7.6.1 Sampling Locations................................................................................................... 135
7.6.2 Air Monitoring Procedure .......................................................................................... 136
7.6.3 Results and Discussion ............................................................................................. 137
7.7 Noise Quality ............................................................................................................................. 137
7.7.1 Sampling Locations................................................................................................... 137
7.7.2 Noise Monitoring Procedure ..................................................................................... 138
7.7.3 Results and Discussion ............................................................................................. 139
7.8 Groundwater Quality .................................................................................................................. 141
7.9 Surface Water Quality ................................................................................................................ 142
7.10 Soil Quality................................................................................................................................. 145
7.11 Biodiversity Baseline .................................................................................................................. 146
7.11.1 Desktop Assessment ................................................................................................ 147
7.11.2 Ecoregion Description ............................................................................................... 147
7.11.3 World Heritage Areas................................................................................................ 148
7.11.4 Ramsar Sites ............................................................................................................ 149
7.11.5 Key Biodiversity Areas .............................................................................................. 149
7.11.6 Protected Areas ........................................................................................................ 154
7.11.7 Endemic Bird Areas .................................................................................................. 157
7.11.8 Vietnam Forest Classifications .................................................................................. 160
7.11.9 Species of Conservation Interest .............................................................................. 162
7.11.10 Invasive Species ....................................................................................................... 169
7.11.11 Ecologically Appropriate Area for Analysis ............................................................... 169
7.11.12 Natural Habitat and Modified Habitat ........................................................................ 172
7.11.13 Biodiversity Field Surveys ......................................................................................... 182
7.11.14 Shared Data from Gelex Huong Phung Wind Power Projects .................................. 218
7.11.15 Critical Habitat Assessment ...................................................................................... 220
8. SOCIO-ECONOMIC BASELINE .............................................................................................. 237

8.1 Introduction ................................................................................................................................ 237
8.1.1 Introduction to the Report ......................................................................................... 237
8.1.2 Methodology ............................................................................................................. 238
8.2 National Context ........................................................................................................................ 242
8.2.1 Demographic Information .......................................................................................... 242
8.2.2 Institutional Context .................................................................................................. 244
8.2.3 Economy and Industry .............................................................................................. 245
8.2.4 Human Rights ........................................................................................................... 249
8.3 Provincial Context: Quang Tri .................................................................................................... 250

8.3.1 Overview of Quang Tri Province ............................................................................... 250

8.3.2 Population ................................................................................................................. 252
8.3.3 Ethnic Minorities........................................................................................................ 254
8.3.4 Religion ..................................................................................................................... 255
8.3.5 Infrastructure and Public Services ............................................................................ 255
8.3.6 Land Use and Tenure ............................................................................................... 257
8.3.7 Economic Development ............................................................................................ 259
8.3.8 Education .................................................................................................................. 262
8.3.9 Health ....................................................................................................................... 264
8.3.10 Vulnerability .............................................................................................................. 265
8.3.11 Security and Rule of Law/Governance ...................................................................... 265
8.3.12 Archaeological, Cultural Heritage and Religious Sites .............................................. 266
8.4 District Context: Huong Hoa ...................................................................................................... 266
8.4.1 Overview of Huong Hoa District ................................................................................ 266
8.4.2 Population ................................................................................................................. 267
8.4.3 Ethnicity .................................................................................................................... 268
8.4.4 Religion ..................................................................................................................... 269
8.4.5 Infrastructure and Public Services ............................................................................ 269
8.4.6 Land Use and Tenure ............................................................................................... 271
8.4.7 Economic Development ............................................................................................ 272
8.4.8 Education .................................................................................................................. 274
8.4.9 Health ....................................................................................................................... 275
8.4.10 Security and Rule of Law/Governance ...................................................................... 276
8.4.11 Vulnerability .............................................................................................................. 276
8.4.12 Archaeological, Cultural Heritage and Religious Sites .............................................. 279
8.5 Communal Context: Tan Lap, Tan Lien, Khe Sanh, and Huong Tan ......................................... 280
8.5.1 Tan Lap Commune ................................................................................................... 280
8.5.2 Tan Lien Commune .................................................................................................. 286
8.5.3 Khe Sanh Commune-level Town .............................................................................. 292
8.5.4 Huong Tan Commune............................................................................................... 300
8.6 Project Affected Villages ............................................................................................................ 309
8.7 Household Level Data Analysis ................................................................................................. 315
8.7.1 Survey Sampling ....................................................................................................... 315
8.7.2 Demographic Information .......................................................................................... 315
8.7.3 Employment and Livelihoods .................................................................................... 324
8.7.4 Income and Expenditure ........................................................................................... 336
8.7.5 Land, Housing and Household Assets ...................................................................... 341
8.7.6 Health and Healthcare Issues ................................................................................... 350
8.7.7 Access to Public Services ......................................................................................... 354
8.7.8 Local Perceptions about their Well-being .................................................................. 357
8.8 Local Perceptions about the Project and Project Impacts .......................................................... 358
8.8.1 Local Perceptions about the Project ......................................................................... 358
8.8.2 Land Acquisition and Livelihood Restoration Strategy .............................................. 361
8.9 Vulnerability Analysis ................................................................................................................. 369
8.9.1 Overview ................................................................................................................... 369
8.9.2 Multiple Vulnerability ................................................................................................. 370
8.9.3 Vulnerability Category ............................................................................................... 370
8.9.4 Income Structure of Vulnerable Households ............................................................. 371
8.9.5 Support Circles of Vulnerable Households ............................................................... 372
8.10 Gender Analysis ........................................................................................................................ 372
8.10.1 Gender Equity Policies and Institutions ..................................................................... 372
8.10.2 Gender Equity Programs and Projects ...................................................................... 373
8.10.3 A Gender Baseline based on the Project’s Household Survey ................................. 374
8.10.4 Intra-household Gender Relations ............................................................................ 377
8.10.5 Social Support Circle of Women Villagers ................................................................ 380

9. ENVIRONMENTAL IMPACT ASSESSMENT .......................................................................... 381

9.1 Air Quality Impact Assessment .................................................................................................. 381
9.1.1 Scope of Assessment ............................................................................................... 381
9.1.2 Baseline Conditions .................................................................................................. 381
9.1.3 Impact Assessment................................................................................................... 381
9.2 Noise Impact Assessment ......................................................................................................... 390
9.3 Water Resource Impact Assessment ......................................................................................... 412
9.4 Soil Environment Impact Assessment ....................................................................................... 425
9.5 Electromagnetic Interference Assessment ................................................................................ 434
9.5.2 Relevant Guidelines and Criteria .............................................................................. 434
9.5.3 Assessment Methodology ......................................................................................... 435
9.6 Climate Change Impact Assessment ......................................................................................... 442
9.7 Shadow Flicker Impact Assessment .......................................................................................... 450
9.7.2 Applicable Standards ................................................................................................ 450
9.7.3 Receptors ................................................................................................................. 451
9.7.4 Shadow Flicker Analysis ........................................................................................... 453
9.7.5 Model Results ........................................................................................................... 455
9.8 Visual Impact Assessment ......................................................................................................... 473
9.8.2 Consideration and Assumption ................................................................................. 474
9.8.3 Assessment Methodology ......................................................................................... 474
9.8.4 Visual Baseline ......................................................................................................... 474
9.9 Biodiversity Impact Assessment ................................................................................................ 490
9.9.1 Summary of Scope of Assessment ........................................................................... 491
9.9.2 Relevant Guidelines and Criteria .............................................................................. 492
9.9.3 Impact Assessment Criteria ...................................................................................... 493
9.10 Traffic and Transport Assessment ............................................................................................. 511
9.10.2 Baseline Condition .................................................................................................... 512
9.11 Environmental Impact Summary ................................................................................................ 519
10. SOCIAL IMPACT ASSESSMENT............................................................................................ 520

10.1 Scope of Assessment ................................................................................................................ 520

10.2 Impacts on Economic Displacement and Loss of Livelihoods.................................................... 524

10.2.1 Summary of Project’s Land Use................................................................................ 524
10.2.2 Potential Impacts ...................................................................................................... 529
10.2.3 Existing Controls ....................................................................................................... 531
10.2.4 Significance of Impacts ............................................................................................. 532
10.2.5 Additional Mitigation and Management Measures .................................................... 532
10.2.6 Residual Impacts ...................................................................................................... 533
10.2.7 Monitoring and Audit ................................................................................................. 533
10.3 Disturbance to Agricultural Production ....................................................................................... 534
10.4 Impacts on Community Health, Safety and Security during Construction .................................. 536
10.5 Impacts Associated with Construction Workers ......................................................................... 539
10.6 Benefits to Local Communities .................................................................................................. 542
10.6.3 Enhancement Measures ........................................................................................... 543
10.7 Disturbance on Local Community during Operation Phase ....................................................... 544
10.7.4 Additional Mitigation Measures ................................................................................. 545
10.8 Impacts on Indigenous Peoples ................................................................................................. 546
10.9 Gender Impact Assessment....................................................................................................... 553
10.9.4 Additional Measures ................................................................................................. 554
10.9.6 Monitoring and Evaluation ........................................................................................ 555

10.9.7 Gender Mainstreaming Category .............................................................................. 555

10.10 Summary ................................................................................................................................... 556
11. UNPLANNED EVENTS ............................................................................................................ 557

11.1 Scope of Assessment ................................................................................................................ 557
11.2 Relevant Guidelines and Regulatory Requirements .................................................................. 557
11.2.1 Vietnamese Regulations ........................................................................................... 557
11.2.2 International Standards and Requirements ............................................................... 557
11.3 Assessment of Potential Impacts ............................................................................................... 558
11.3.1 During Site Preparation and Construction ................................................................. 563
11.3.2 During Commissioning and Operation ...................................................................... 568
12. CUMULATIVE IMPACT ASSESSMENT.................................................................................. 577

12.1 Introduction ................................................................................................................................ 577
12.2 Relevant Guidelines and Criteria ............................................................................................... 577
12.3 Methodology .............................................................................................................................. 577
12.3.1 Determining Spatial and Temporal Boundaries and VECs ....................................... 578
12.3.2 Identifying VECs and their Present Conditions ......................................................... 578
12.3.3 Identifying Developments and External Social Stressors Affecting VECs ................. 578
12.3.4 Identification and Assessment of Impacts ................................................................. 579
12.3.5 Development of Management, Mitigation and Monitoring Measures ........................ 579
12.4 Scoping Assessment ................................................................................................................. 580
12.4.1 Identification of VECs................................................................................................ 580
12.4.2 Spatial Boundaries .................................................................................................... 580
12.4.3 Existing and Planned Developments ........................................................................ 580
12.4.4 Scope of CIA ............................................................................................................. 586
12.5 Cumulative Impact on Habitat Loss ........................................................................................... 586
12.5.2 Significance of Impact ............................................................................................... 586
12.5.3 Mitigation and Management Measures ..................................................................... 587
12.6 Cumulative Impact on Bird Collision .......................................................................................... 587
12.7 Cumulative Impacts on Bat Mortality ......................................................................................... 589
12.8 Cumulative Impacts on Mammals .............................................................................................. 591
12.9 Cumulative Impacts on Economy and Employment ................................................................... 592
12.10 Cumulative Impacts on Community Health and Safety .............................................................. 593
12.11 Cumulative Impact on Traffic ..................................................................................................... 594
12.12 Cumulative Impacts on Local Community Livelihood ................................................................. 595
12.13 Cumulative Impacts on Infrastructure and Public Services ........................................................ 596
12.14 Cumulative Impacts on Indigenous Peoples .............................................................................. 597
13. ENVIRONMENTAL AND SOCIAL MANAGEMENT PLAN ..................................................... 601

13.1 Introduction and Objectives ....................................................................................................... 601
13.2 Responsibility for ESMP Implementation ................................................................................... 601
13.2.1 Project Management ................................................................................................. 602
13.2.2 Employees ................................................................................................................ 607

13.2.3 Training, Awareness and Competency ..................................................................... 607

13.2.4 Monitoring, Review, Audit and Reporting .................................................................. 608
13.2.5 Project Environmental and Social Management Plan ............................................... 608
13.2.6 ESMP links to Other EHSS Management Plans ....................................................... 608
13.2.7 Plans, Policies and Procedures ................................................................................ 609
13.2.8 Construction and Operation Environmental and Social Management Plan ............... 611
REFERENCES .................................................................................................................................... 705
APPENDIX A WIND TURBINE DETAILED NOISE DATA

APPENDIX B SHADOW FLICKER MAIN RESULTS
APPENDIX C IBAT REPORT
APPENDIX D CRITICAL HABITAT SCREENING
APPENDIX E GBIF RESULT
APPENDIX F EBIRD RESULT
APPENDIX G LIST OF INVASIVE SPECIES
APPENDIX H BIODIVERSITY FIELD SURVEY REPORT
APPENDIX I LIST OF CONSTRUCTION EQUIPMENT
APPENDIX J CUMULATIVE IMPACT ASSESSMENT SCOPING
APPENDIX K NOISE BASELINE SURVEY REPORT
APPENDIX L SOCIO-ECONOMIC BASELINE REPORT
APPENDIX M PHYSICAL ENVIRONMENTAL BASELINE REPORT
APPENDIX N MINUTES OF MEETINGS IN MAY, SEPTEMBER, AND NOVEMBER 2020
APPENDIX O GELEX HUONG PHUNG WIND POWER PROJECTS - BIODIVERSITY FIELD
SURVEY (SECONDARY DATA)
APPENDIX P SHADOW FLICKER FIELD VALIDATION SURVEY
APPENDIX Q DRAWING LIEN LAP SPOIL DISPOSAL SITE
APPENDIX R CONSTRUCTION METHOD OF LIEN LAP DISPOSAL SITE
APPENDIX S MINUTES OF MEETING AND LIST OF ATTENDEES IN DECEMBER 2020
APPENDIX T SECOND BIRD AND BAT FIELD SURVEY RESULTS
APPENDIX U SEDIMENT CONTROL DESIGN FOR INTERNAL ROAD'S DRAINAGE SYSTEM
APPENDIX V INVASIVE SPECIES MANAGEMENT PLAN
APPENDIX W BAT PROTECTION PROTOCOL
APPENDIX X WILDLIFE SHEPHERING PROTOCOL
APPENDIX Y DETAILED BIRD AND BAT MONITORING PLAN
APPENDIX Z INJURED WILDLIFE MANAGEMENT PROTOCOL
List of Tables
Table 1.1 Project’s Components .................................................................................................................... 31
Table 1.2 Scope of Baseline and Impact Assessment ................................................................................... 34
Table 1.3 IESE Structure ............................................................................................................................... 35
Table 2.1 Comparison of Power Generation Methods ................................................................................... 41
Table 2.2 Calculated Annual Energy for Lien Lap Windfarm .......................................................................... 44
Table 2.3 Area of Land for the Project ........................................................................................................... 46
Table 2.4 Locations of Project’s Study Area................................................................................................... 47

Table 2.5 Locations of Project’s Wind Turbines ............................................................................................. 47

Table 2.6 Lien Lap Wind Power Project Schedule ......................................................................................... 49
Table 2.7 Construction Milestone ................................................................................................................... 50
Table 2.8 Specifications of Rotor ................................................................................................................... 52
Table 2.9 Lien Lap Wind Farm 35kV Transmission Line’s Specification ........................................................ 53
Table 2.10 Specification of 35/110 kV Huong Tan Substation ......................................................................... 59
Table 4.1 Impact Characteristic Terminology ................................................................................................. 89
Table 4.2 Impact Type Definitions .................................................................................................................. 90
Table 4.3 Definitions for Likelihood Designations........................................................................................... 90
Table 4.4 Impact Significance ........................................................................................................................ 91
Table 4.5 Indicative Levels of Consequence for Potential Impacts from Unplanned Events .......................... 96
Table 4.6 Risk Matrix for Potential Unplanned Events ................................................................................... 97
Table 5.1 Characteristics of the Van Kieu Ethnic ......................................................................................... 100
Table 5.2 Resources/Receptors Considered during Scoping ....................................................................... 102
Table 5.3 Scoping Matrix ............................................................................................................................. 108
Table 6.1 Summary of Stakeholder Engagement Activities with Authorities and Relevant Organisations
during IESE Process .................................................................................................................... 110
Table 6.2 Details of FGDs ............................................................................................................................ 111
Table 6.3 Summary of Stakeholder Engagement Activities during IESE Process........................................ 112
Table 6.4 Concerns from Authorities during IESE Engagement................................................................... 113
Table 6.5 Concerns from Communities during IESE Engagement............................................................... 114
Table 6.6 Recommendations from Stakeholder Engagement during IESE Process .................................... 114
Table 6.7 Local Needs and Recommendations............................................................................................ 115
Table 6.8 Engagement activities in November 2020 .................................................................................... 116
Table 6.9 Concerns about the Project’s development ................................................................................. 117
Table 6.10 Overview of NTFP Collection Activity ........................................................................................... 117
Table 6.11 Project Impacts on NTFP Collection............................................................................................. 118
Table 6.12 Statistics of Participants in the December 2020 Information Disclosure and Consultation Program
..................................................................................................................................................... 119
Table 6.13 Impacts Raised by Affected Villagers and Measures Committed by the Project Owner ............... 120
Table 7.1 Average Monthly Wind Speed (m/s) ............................................................................................. 129
Table 7.2 List of Floods in Quang Tri Province ............................................................................................ 132
Table 7.3 Physico-Mechanical Properties of Soil Layers ............................................................................. 134
Table 7.4 Ambient Air Sampling Sites .......................................................................................................... 135
Table 7.5 Results of Ambient Air Monitoring ................................................................................................ 137
Table 7.6 IFC Noise Level Guidelines .......................................................................................................... 137
Table 7.7 Summary of Noise Measurement Locations ................................................................................. 138
Table 7.8 Groundwater Sampling Sites ........................................................................................................ 141
Table 7.9 Results of Ground Water .............................................................................................................. 142
Table 7.10 Surface Water Sampling Sites ..................................................................................................... 142
Table 7.11 Results of Surface Water Monitoring ............................................................................................ 144
Table 7.12 Soil Sampling Sites ...................................................................................................................... 145
Table 7.13 Results of Soil Sample Monitoring ............................................................................................... 146
Table 7.14 Critically Endangered and Endangered Species within the Ecoregion ......................................... 148
Table 7.15 List of Key Biodiversity Areas within 50-km Radius from Project Site .......................................... 150
Table 7.16 Species of Conservation Interest in Listed KBAs ......................................................................... 151
Table 7.17 Brief Information of Protected Area around the Project Area within 50 km Radius ...................... 154
Table 7.18 IBAs within the Annamese Lowlands EBA ................................................................................... 159
Table 7.19 Threatened Species Predicted within the Study Area .................................................................. 162
Table 7.20 Restricted Range Species Predicted within the Study Area ......................................................... 164
Table 7.21 Threatened Plant Species at Bac Huong Hoa Natural Reserve as Reported by Mahood, S. P. and
Tran Van Hung (2008).................................................................................................................. 165
Table 7.22 Species of Conservation Interest base on GBIF Database .......................................................... 168

Table 7.23 Candidate Species Habitat Requirements and EAAA .................................................................. 169
Table 7.24 Natural and Modified Habitat Areas within the Study Area ........................................................... 179
Table 7.25 Habitats and Area within EAAA .................................................................................................... 179
Table 7.26 Habitats and Area within Project Footprint ................................................................................... 179
Table 7.27 Field Surveys Undertaken within the Study Area ......................................................................... 183
Table 7.28 List of Identified Flora Species in Listed IUCN Red List ............................................................... 187
Table 7.29 List of Plant Invasive .................................................................................................................... 188
Table 7.30 List of Bird Species Recorded along the Terrestrial Transects ..................................................... 189
Table 7.31 List of Bird Species Recorded during the Vantage Point Survey .................................................. 194
Table 7.32 Flock Size of Species (First Survey)............................................................................................. 199
Table 7.33 Estimation number of bird fatal caused by collision at Lien Lap wind farm................................... 200
Table 7.34 Bat Species Found within the Surveyed Sites in Lien Lap Wind Farm ......................................... 205
Table 7.35 Risk Classification Guide of Bat Species...................................................................................... 207
Table 7.36 Summary of Bat Calls’ Parameter Recorded along the Transects ............................................... 207
Table 7.37 List of Non-volant Mammals in Quang Tri Province from Interview Results ................................. 215
Table 7.38 Amphibian Species Found Within the Field Survey ...................................................................... 217
Table 7.39 Reptiles Species Found Within the Field Survey .......................................................................... 218
Table 7.40 Critical Habitat Criteria (IFC PS6 Guidance Note 2012) ............................................................... 221
Table 7.41 Species Trigger Criterion 1 ........................................................................................................... 223
Table 7.42 Potential Restricted-Range Species (IBAT 2020) ........................................................................ 232
Table 8.1 Administrative Units of Quang Tri Province .................................................................................. 251
Table 8.2 Statistics on Health Services in Quang Tri Province 2018 ........................................................... 264
Table 8.3 Number of Villages “with Special Difficulties” in Quang Tri Province ............................................ 265
Table 8.4 Households and Population of Huong Hoa District by Ethnicity 2018 .......................................... 268
Table 8.5 Statistics on Health Services in Huong Hoa District 2018 ............................................................ 275
Table 8.6 Poverty Reduction Program Implementation Results of Huong Hoa District 2019 ....................... 278
Table 8.7 Demographic Information of Khe Sanh Commune-level Town ..................................................... 293
Table 8.8 Education System in Khe Sanh Town .......................................................................................... 298
Table 8.9 Demographics of Project Affected Villages .................................................................................. 311
Table 8.10 Main Livelihoods of the Affected Villages ..................................................................................... 312
Table 8.11 Infrastructure and Public Services in the Surveyed Villages ........................................................ 313
Table 8.12 Household Size of the Surveyed Villages..................................................................................... 316
Table 8.13 Length of Local Residence of the Surveyed Households ............................................................. 317
Table 8.14 Surveyed Population by Age Group and Gender ......................................................................... 320
Table 8.15 Surveyed Labour Force by Livelihood .......................................................................................... 324
Table 8.16 Surveyed Working People with Secondary Occupation ............................................................... 325
Table 8.17 Agricultural Cultivation in the Surveyed Households by Village ................................................... 329
Table 8.18 Changes in Agriculture and Forestry Production in the Surveyed Villages over the Last Five Years
..................................................................................................................................................... 333
Table 8.19 Livelihood Diversification of the Surveyed Households ................................................................ 336
Table 8.20 Average Monthly Income and Expenditure per Household and per Capita .................................. 336
Table 8.21 Average Monthly Expenditure per Household and Capita ............................................................ 339
Table 8.22 Residential and Garden Land Ownership among the Surveyed Households ............................... 341
Table 8.23 Agricultural Land Ownership among the Surveyed Households .................................................. 342
Table 8.24 Forestry Land Ownership among the Surveyed Households ....................................................... 343
Table 8.25 Alcohol and Tobacco Use of the Surveyed Population ................................................................ 353
Table 8.26 Place of Birth of the Youngest Members Born by Timeframe....................................................... 353
Table 8.27 Well-Being Ranking by FGD Group.............................................................................................. 358
Table 8.28 Participation of the Surveyed Households in Community Consultation ........................................ 361
Table 8.29 Land Compensation Payment Received by Affected Households ............................................... 363
Table 8.30 Livelihood Impacts by the Project ................................................................................................. 365
Table 8.31 Current Livelihood Challenges of Affected Households ............................................................... 366
Table 8.32 Concerns of Affected Households ................................................................................................ 368

Table 8.33 Local Needs and Recommendations............................................................................................ 368

Table 8.36 Gendered Labour Division and Decision Making ......................................................................... 379
Table 9.1 Scopes of Air Quality Impact Assessment .................................................................................... 381
Table 9.2 Dust Emission Magnitude............................................................................................................. 383
Table 9.3 Dust Emission Magnitude for Lien Lap Site .................................................................................. 385
Table 9.4 Criteria for Assessing the Sensitivity of the Area to Dust Soiling Effects on People and Property 385
Table 9.5 Criteria for Assessing the Sensitivity of the Area to Human Health Impacts ................................ 385
Table 9.6 Criteria for Assessing the Sensitivity of the Area to Ecological Impacts ....................................... 386
Table 9.7 Sensitivity of the Surrounding Area .............................................................................................. 387
Table 9.8 Risk of Dust Impacts - Earthwork ................................................................................................. 388
Table 9.9 Risk of Dust Impacts - Construction ............................................................................................. 388
Table 9.10 Risk of Dust Impacts - Trackout ................................................................................................... 388
Table 9.11 Risks of Impacts on Air Quality during Pre-Construction and Construction Phases ..................... 388
Table 9.12 Scope of Noise Impact Assessment ............................................................................................. 390
Table 9.13 List of Construction Equipment, Its Average Maximum Noise Level and Distance to be
Experienced IFC Noise Level Thresholds for Both Daytime and Nighttime .................................. 396
Table 9.14 Number of Allowed Equipment at One Location ........................................................................... 397
Table 9.15 Typical Equipment and Vehicles with Its Vibration Level .............................................................. 398
Table 9.16 Predicted Vibration Level at Certain Distance during Construction Phase ................................... 398
Table 9.17 Noise Impact during Construction Phase ..................................................................................... 399
Table 9.18 Assessment Features, Inputs and Assumptions .......................................................................... 402
Table 9.19 Vestas V150- Reference Spectrum Used to Represent Vestas V150-4.0 MW ............................ 403
Table 9.20 Representative Noise Sensitive Receptors .................................................................................. 403
Table 9.21 Predicted Operational Noise Levels at NSRs (LAeq) ................................................................... 404
Table 9.22 Noise Impact Significance during Operation Phase ..................................................................... 411
Table 9.23 Scopes of Water Resources Assessment .................................................................................... 413
Table 9.24 Sensitivity Assessment Criteria for Water Resources .................................................................. 415
Table 9.25 Criteria for Impact Magnitude for Water Resource Impact Assessment ....................................... 416
Table 9.26 Impact on Water Resource Competition....................................................................................... 419
Table 9.27 Emission factor of Domestic Wastewater Pollutants .................................................................... 421
Table 9.28 Estimated Concentration of Pollutants in Wastewater Discharge from Workers’ Activities .......... 422
Table 9.29 Impact on Water Quality from the Construction Activities and Worker’s Activities ....................... 423
Table 9.30 Scopes of Soil Environment Assessment ..................................................................................... 425
Table 9.31 Sensitivity Assessment Criteria for Soil quality (Compaction, Erosion and Contamination) ......... 427
Table 9.32 Criteria for Impact Magnitude for Assessment of Impact to Soil ................................................... 427
Table 9.33 Impact on Soil Compaction and Erosion in the Construction Phase ............................................ 429
Table 9.34 Monitoring for Soil Compaction and Erosion Management .......................................................... 431
Table 9.35 Impact on Soil Contamination in contruction phase ..................................................................... 432
Table 9.36 Impact on Soil Contamination in operation phase ........................................................................ 433
Table 9.37 Basic Restriction and Reference Levels for Exposure to 50Hz EMF at the Edge of Right of Way
(ROW) .......................................................................................................................................... 435
Table 9.38 Transmission Line Parameter ...................................................................................................... 436
Table 9.39 EMF Impact Assessment from Overhead Transmission Line for the Operation Phase ................ 439
Table 9.40 Impacts of EMF during Operation Phase from the 35kV Underground Transmission Line .......... 440
Table 9.41 Amount of Living Biomass Before and After Land Conversion ..................................................... 445
Table 9.42 Annual GHG Emissions from Land Clearing in the Preparation Phase ........................................ 445
Table 9.43 Tiers Approach for Estimation of GHG ......................................................................................... 445
Table 9.44 Default Emissions Factors and Energy Content Factor for Diesel Combustion in Mobile Equipment
and Vehicles ................................................................................................................................. 446
Table 9.45 Estimated CO2 Emission from Operation of Heavy Equipment .................................................... 447
Table 9.46 Estimated CO2 Emission from Transportation of Materials and Equipment ................................. 447

Table 9.47 Climate Change Impacts to Wind Power Production and Infrastructure ....................................... 449
Table 9.48 WindPRO Shadow Module Inputs (in Bold the Differences among Worst Case and Real Case
Scenario) ...................................................................................................................................... 455
Table 9.49 Summarisation of Validated Shadow Flickering Receptors Based on Real-Case Scenario ......... 465
Table 9.50 Impacts of Shadow Flickering ...................................................................................................... 472
Table 9.51 Horizontal Field of View................................................................................................................ 477
Table 9.52 Vertical Field of View .................................................................................................................... 477
Table 9.53 Sensitivity of Visual Receptors ..................................................................................................... 482
Table 9.54 Magnitude of Visual Effect ............................................................................................................ 483
Table 9.55 Significance of Visual Effect ......................................................................................................... 484
Table 9.56 Summary of Visual Impact ........................................................................................................... 490
Table 9.57 Potential Threats to Biodiversity Values ....................................................................................... 491
Table 9.58 Scoping of Potential Impacts during Project Phases .................................................................... 492
Table 9.59 Habitat Impact Assessment – Significance Criteria ...................................................................... 494
Table 9.60 Species Impact Assessment – Significance Criteria .................................................................... 495
Table 9.61 Land Acquisition of the Project Footprint ...................................................................................... 497
Table 9.62 Loss of Terrestrial Habitat Impact Assessment ............................................................................ 497
Table 9.63 Disturbance or Displacement Impact Assessment ....................................................................... 501
Table 9.64 Barrier Creation and Edge Effects Impact Assessment................................................................ 503
Table 9.65 Degradation of Habitats Impact ................................................................................................... 505
Table 9.66 Bird Mortality Impact Assessment ................................................................................................ 507
Table 9.67 Collision Risks of Identified Bats .................................................................................................. 509
Table 9.68 Bat Collision Impact Assessment ................................................................................................. 510
Table 9.69 Estimated Number of Heavy Load Vehicle Movement ................................................................. 515
Table 9.70 Impact to Traffic Congestion and Road Infrastructure Due to Increased Transportation Volume
during Construction ...................................................................................................................... 516
Table 9.71 Impact to Traffic Safety Due to Increased Transportation Volume during Construction ............... 517
Table 9.72 Summary of Environmental Impact Assessment .......................................................................... 519
Table 10.1 Summary of Potential Impacts, Receptors and Area of Influence ................................................ 521
Table 10.2 Land Use Area for Lien Lap Project ............................................................................................. 525
Table 10.3 Summary of the CSR process for Lien Lap Wind Farm Project as of November 2020 ................ 527
Table 10.4 Summary of Project’s Affected Households ................................................................................. 529
Table 10.5 Percieved Impacts by Households with Land Acquisition for 35 kV Transmission Line and
Mitigation Measures Committed by the Project ............................................................................ 531
Table 10.6 Economic Displacement and Loss of Livelihood .......................................................................... 532
Table 10.7 Disturbance to Agriculture Production due to Construction and Operation Activities ................... 534
Table 10.8 Impacts Associated with Non-Influx Issues during Construction Phase ....................................... 538
Table 10.9 Impacts Associated with Influx Issues during Construction .......................................................... 541
Table 10.10 Disturbance to Local Community during Operation ...................................................................... 545
Table 10.11 Evaluation of Indigenous Peoples ................................................................................................ 546
Table 10.12 Main Livelihoods of the Surveyed Working People ...................................................................... 547
Table 10.13 NTFP Collection in Project Affected Villages ................................................................................ 548
Table 10.14 Impacts on Indigenous Peoples ................................................................................................... 551
Table 10.15 Gender Impacts ............................................................................................................................ 554
Table 10.16 Summary of Social Impact Assessment ....................................................................................... 556
Table 11.1 Applicable Equator Principles and IFC Performance Standards for Unplanned Events ............... 557
Table 11.2 Unplanned Events Leading to Potential Impacts .......................................................................... 558
Table 11.3 Potential Impacts from Unplanned Events and Pre-mitigation Risk Ranking ............................... 560
Table 11.4 Preventative and Mitigation Measures of Leakage and Spills Incidents during Pre- Construction
and Construction Phase ............................................................................................................... 564
Table 11.5 Preventative and Mitigation Measures of Traffic Accident ............................................................ 566
Table 11.6 Preventative and Mitigation Measures of Fire and Explosion during the Pre-Construction and
Construction Phase ...................................................................................................................... 567

Table 11.7 Preventative and Mitigation Measures of Leakage and Spill during Commission and Operation
Phase ........................................................................................................................................... 569
Table 11.8 Preventative and Mitigation Measures of Fire and Explosion during the Commission and Operation
Phase ........................................................................................................................................... 570
Table 11.9 Setback Distances Adopted for Lien Lap Wind Turbines as per IFC Wind EHS Guidelines ........ 572
Table 11.10 Preventative and Mitigation Measures of Blade Ejection Failure during Commission and Operation
Phase ........................................................................................................................................... 573
Table 11.11 Preventative and Mitigation Measures of Transmission Line Snapping and Transmission Pylon
Collapse ....................................................................................................................................... 574
Table 11.12 Preventative and Mitigation Measures of Natural Hazards ........................................................... 576
Table 12.1 Key Developers in the Immediate Region .................................................................................... 582
Table 12.2 Scoping Matrix ............................................................................................................................. 584
Table 12.3 Species Occupy Predominantly Area ........................................................................................... 586
Table 12.4 Loss of Terrestrial Habitat Impact Assessment ............................................................................ 587
Table 12.5 Important Bird Areas within 50 km Radius ................................................................................... 588
Table 12.6 Cumulative Impact Scoping for Economy and Employment ......................................................... 592
Table 12.7 Cumulative Impact Scoping for Community Health and Safety .................................................... 593
Table 12.8 Cumulative Impact Scoping for Traffic.......................................................................................... 594
Table 12.9 Cumulative Impacts Scoping for Local Community Livelihood ..................................................... 595
Table 12.10 Details of Type of Acquired Land for Wind Project Development in Huong Hoa District .............. 596
Table 12.11 Cumulative Impacts Scoping for Infrastructure and Public Services ............................................ 597
Table 12.12 Affected Communes of Wind Project Development in Huong Hoa District ................................... 598
Table 12.13 Cumulative Impact Scoping for Indigenous Peoples .................................................................... 600
Table 13.1 Specific Management Plans and Policies..................................................................................... 609
Table 13.2 Timeline and Responsibilities for Implementation of ESMP Plans ............................................... 611
Table 13.3 Environmental and Social Management and Monitoring Plan Budget Cost during construction
phase and the 1st year of operation phase. .................................................................................. 613
Table 13.4 Air Quality Management ............................................................................................................... 614
Table 13.5 Noise Effect Management ............................................................................................................ 618
Table 13.6 Water Resource Management ..................................................................................................... 623
Table 13.7 Soil Management ......................................................................................................................... 633
Table 13.8 Electromagnetic Interference Management.................................................................................. 646
Table 13.9 Climate change impact adaption and mitigation ........................................................................... 650
Table 13.10 Shadow Flicker Management ....................................................................................................... 653
Table 13.11 Visual Impact Management .......................................................................................................... 655
Table 13.12 Biodiversity Management ............................................................................................................. 656
Table 13.13 Traffic and Transportation Management ...................................................................................... 669
Table 13.14 Social Impact Management .......................................................................................................... 672
Table 13.15 Unplanned Event Management .................................................................................................... 691
List of Figures
Figure 0.1 Project Location ............................................................................................................................. 22
Figure 1.1 Project Location ............................................................................................................................. 32
Figure 1.2 Ancillary Facilities of the Project ..................................................................................................... 33
Figure 1.3 Laydown Area of the Project .......................................................................................................... 33
Figure 2.1 Progress of Primary Energy Supply between 2007 and 2017 ........................................................ 37
Figure 2.2 Total Primary Energy Supply (TPES) and RE Share in TPES across Analysed Scenarios in the
Period 2020-2050 ........................................................................................................................... 38
Figure 2.3 Evolution of Total Final Energy Consumption (TFEC) by Sector in the Analysed Scenarios in the
Period 2020-2050 ........................................................................................................................... 39
Figure 2.4 Option 1 of Project’s Wind Turbine Layout ..................................................................................... 43
Figure 2.5 Option 2 of Project’s Wind Turbine Layout ..................................................................................... 44

Figure 2.6 35 kV Transmission Line in Lien Lap Wind Farm ........................................................................... 49

Figure 2.7 Flow Diagram of Project’s Power Production Process ................................................................... 51
Figure 2.8 Relationship between Project Components Funded by ADB and Other Project-Related
Components ................................................................................................................................... 52
Figure 2.9 Internal Road System of Lien Lap Wind Farm ................................................................................ 54
Figure 2.10 Access road of Lien Lap Wind Farm .............................................................................................. 55
Figure 2.11 Layout of Spoil Disposal Site of No.4, No.6 and No.6A .................................................................. 56
Figure 2.12 Layout of Spoil Disposal Site of No.8, 8A, 9,10,11,12 and 13 ........................................................ 57
Figure 2.13 Photo of a Pre-disposed Spoil Disposal Site (taken by PCC1) ....................................................... 57
Figure 2.14 An Example for the Current Spoil Disposal Site ............................................................................. 58
Figure 2.15 Operation House’s Layout .............................................................................................................. 60
Figure 2.16 Round Shaped Turbine Foundation ............................................................................................... 61
Figure 2.17 Wind Turbine Installation ................................................................................................................ 62
Figure 2.18 Equipment Transportation Route ................................................................................................... 64
Figure 2.19 Material Transportation Route ........................................................................................................ 65
Figure 2.20 Manpower Resource for Construction Phase ................................................................................. 67
Figure 3.1 Structure of EIA Process in Vietnam .............................................................................................. 70
Figure 3.2 Land Compensation, Support and Resettlement Process Required in Vietnam ............................ 73
Figure 3.3 Safety Corridor Required for Transmission Lines ........................................................................... 74
Figure 3.4 IFC Performance Standards ........................................................................................................... 83
Figure 4.1 Process for Producing an IESE ...................................................................................................... 87
Figure 4.2 IA Process ...................................................................................................................................... 89
Figure 4.3 IESE and CIA Analysis (IFC 2013) ................................................................................................. 94
Figure 4.4 Six-Step Approach for CIA (IFC 2013) ........................................................................................... 95
Figure 5.1 Areas of Influence of Noise and Shadow Flicker .......................................................................... 104
Figure 5.2 Areas of Influence of Blade Throw ............................................................................................... 104
Figure 5.3 Areas of Influence of Community Health and Safety .................................................................... 105
Figure 5.4 Ecological Area of Influence ......................................................................................................... 105
Figure 5.5 Social and Physical Environment Sensitive Receptors ................................................................ 106
Figure 5.6 Key Protected Areas .................................................................................................................... 107
Figure 7.1 Locations of Meteorology and Hydrology Stations in Quang Tri Province .................................... 122
Figure 7.2 Average Monthly Temperature in Huong Hoa District (1998 – 2017) ........................................... 123
Figure 7.3 Average Monthly Humidity in Huong Hoa District (1998 - 2017) .................................................. 124
Figure 7.4 Monthly Evaporation (1977 – 2017) ............................................................................................. 124
Figure 7.5 Average Number of Foggy Days per Month in Huong Hoa District (2007 – 2018) ....................... 125
Figure 7.6 Average Monthly Sun Hours in Huong Hoa District (2019 – 2020) .............................................. 125
Figure 7.7 Wind Speed (1998 - 2018) ........................................................................................................... 126
Figure 7.8 Wind Rose at 77m (Left) and 60m (Right) (1998 – 2018)............................................................. 128
Figure 7.9 Average Rainfall in Khe Sanh Town (1998 – 2018) ..................................................................... 130
Figure 7.10 Typhoons with Wind Exceeding 12 Category in Beaufort Scale in Vietnam East Sea (1990-2015)
..................................................................................................................................................... 131
Figure 7.11 Topography and Drainage System ............................................................................................... 132
Figure 7.12 Days of Extreme Weather in Huong Hoa District (2007 - 2018) ................................................... 133
Figure 7.13 Air Monitoring Locations ............................................................................................................... 136
Figure 7.14 Noise Monitoring Locations .......................................................................................................... 138
Figure 7.15 Leq, 10min (dBA) at Monitoring Site N1 ....................................................................................... 139
Figure 7.16 Diagram of Leq, 10min (dBA) in Monitoring Site N2 ..................................................................... 140
Figure 7.17 Diagram of Leq, 10min (dBA) in Monitoring Site N3 ..................................................................... 140
Figure 7.18 Groundwater Sampling Locations ................................................................................................ 141
Figure 7.19 Surface Water Sampling Locations .............................................................................................. 143
Figure 7.20 Surface Water Sampling Locations with Drainage System .......................................................... 144
Figure 7.21 Soil Sampling Locations ............................................................................................................... 146
Figure 7.22 Key Biodiversity Areas Surrounding Project Area ........................................................................ 153

Figure 7.23 Protected Areas Surrounding Project Area .................................................................................. 156

Figure 7.24 IBAs in Annamese Lowlands EBA ............................................................................................... 158
Figure 7.25 The Location of Protection Forest (VNForest 2012) ..................................................................... 161
Figure 7.26 Ecologically Appropriate Area for Analysis of the Project ............................................................. 171
Figure 7.27 Vegetation Class in Proximity to Project Area .............................................................................. 173
Figure 7.28 Land Classification within Study Area .......................................................................................... 174
Figure 7.29 Satellite Imagery of Bare Land ..................................................................................................... 175
Figure 7.30 Satellite Imagery of Vegetation .................................................................................................... 176
Figure 7.31 Satellite Imagery of Surface Water ............................................................................................... 176
Figure 7.32 Satellite Imagery of Agriculture Land............................................................................................ 177
Figure 7.33 Satellite Imagery of Non-Vegetated Land..................................................................................... 177
Figure 7.34 Natural and Modified Habitat Areas within Study Area ................................................................. 181
Figure 7.35 Location of Line Transect Survey ................................................................................................. 186
Figure 7.36 Vegetation Types of Project Area ................................................................................................. 188
Figure 7.37 Species Accumulation Curve of Birds at Lien Lap Project ............................................................ 192
Figure 7.38 Locations of Two Vantage Points Used in First Survey 2020 Survey ........................................... 193
Figure 7.39 Summary Data Records from VP Counts ..................................................................................... 195
Figure 7.40 Comparison Bird Data between Two Surveys .............................................................................. 196
Figure 7.41 Bird Activities Observed in Band 2 (30-180m) in VP1 (First Survey) ............................................ 197
Figure 7.42 Bird Activities Observed in Band 2 (30-180m) in VP2 (First Survey) ............................................ 198
Figure 7.43 Major Habitat Types within and nearby Project Area.................................................................... 201
Figure 7.44 Bat Survey Locations ................................................................................................................... 202
Figure 7.45 Portraits of Bat Species Captured by Live-Trapping during Field Study ....................................... 203
Figure 7.46 Echolocation Call Structures of Bat Species Recorded by Acoustic Samplings during the Present
Survey .......................................................................................................................................... 204
Figure 7.47 Seasonal Variation in Species Diversity and Relative Abundance of Local Bat Assemblage
Recorded by Live-trappings ......................................................................................................... 209
Figure 7.48 Seasonal Variation in Species Diversity and Relative Abundance of Local Bat Assemblage
Recorded by Acoustic Samplings ................................................................................................. 210
Figure 7.49 Seasional Variation in Overall Activity Patterns of Bats Per Sites ................................................ 211
Figure 7.50 Pairwise Comparison of Average Activitiy Patterns of Bats Recorded in the Two Field Surveys . 212
Figure 7.51 Seasional Variation in Nightly Abundance of Bats at Surveyed Sites per Acoustic Samplings: I –
May, 2029 and II – September, 2020 ........................................................................................... 213
Figure 7.52 Non-volant Mammal Survey Transect .......................................................................................... 214
Figure 7.53 Herpetofauna Survey Transect .................................................................................................... 217
Figure 7.54 The locations of GELEX Huong Phung Wind Power Projects ...................................................... 219
Figure 7.55 Burma Padauk (Pterocarpus macrocarpus) ................................................................................ 224
Figure 7.56 Locations of Two Identified Burma Padauk during Site Survey .................................................... 225
Figure 7.57 Saola (Pseudoryx nghetinhensis)................................................................................................. 226
Figure 7.58 The Distribution of Saola (Timmins 2020) .................................................................................... 227
Figure 7.59 Red-shanked Douc Langur (Pygathrix nemaeus) ........................................................................ 228
Figure 7.60 The Distribution of Red-shanked Douc Langur (Coudrat, et al. 2020) .......................................... 229
Figure 7.61 Pygmy Slow Loris (Nycticebus pygmaeus) .................................................................................. 230
Figure 7.62 The Distribution of Pygmy Slow Loris (Blair, et al. 2020).............................................................. 231
Figure 7.63 Shield-nosed Leaf-nosed (Hipposideros scutinares) (Nguyen, et al. 2010).................................. 233
Figure 7.64 The Distribution of Shield-nosed Leaf-nosed Bat ......................................................................... 234
Figure 8.1 Project Components and Locations.............................................................................................. 237
Figure 8.2 FGD Respondents in May 2020 by Group, Residence and Gender ............................................. 240
Figure 8.3 Snapshot of Vietnam .................................................................................................................... 243
Figure 8.4 The State System of Vietnam....................................................................................................... 244
Figure 8.5 Formal Education Attainment of Commune-level Permanent Staff in Vietnam ............................ 245
Figure 8.6 Vietnam’s GDP at Current Prices by Types of Ownership 2017 and 2018 ................................... 246
Figure 8.7 Vietnam’s GDP at Current Prices by Kinds of Economic Activity 2017-2018 ............................... 247

Figure 8.8 Vietnam’s Average Monthly Income per Capital at Current Prices 2010-2018 ............................. 248
Figure 8.9 Vietnam’s Multi-Dimensional Poverty Rate by Region 2016-2018 ............................................... 249
Figure 8.10 Snapshot of Quang Tri Province .................................................................................................. 251
Figure 8.11 Population of Quang Tri Province by District 2018 ....................................................................... 252
Figure 8.12 Population of Quang Tri Province by District and Residence 2018 .............................................. 253
Figure 8.13 Unemployment Rate of Labour Force at Working Age of Quang Tri Province by Gender 2010-2018
..................................................................................................................................................... 254
Figure 8.14 Religion of Quang Tri Province 2009............................................................................................ 255
Figure 8.15 Land Use Structure of Quang Tri Province 2018 .......................................................................... 258
Figure 8.16 Land Area of Quang Tri Province by District 2018 ....................................................................... 258
Figure 8.17 Quang Tri Province’s Structure of GRDP 2018-2019 ................................................................... 259
Figure 8.18 Livestock of Quang Tri Province 2010-2018 ................................................................................ 260
Figure 8.19 Forested Area of Quang Tri Province 2010-2019 ......................................................................... 261
Figure 8.20 Aquaculture Area and Fishery Production of Quang Tri Province 2010-2019 .............................. 261
Figure 8.21 Number of Schools, Classes, Teachers and Pupils of Quang Tri Province in the School Year 2018-
2019 ............................................................................................................................................. 263
Figure 8.22 School Drop-out Rates of Quang Tri Province 2010-2018 ........................................................... 263
Figure 8.23 Pilgrimage Center of Our Lady of La Vang (left) and Quang Tri Ancient Citadel (right) ............... 266
Figure 8.24 Snapshot of Huong Hoa District ................................................................................................... 267
Figure 8.25 Population of Huong Hoa District by Township/Commune 2018 .................................................. 267
Figure 8.26 Population Sex Ratio of Huong Hoa District by Residence 2010-2018 ........................................ 268
Figure 8.27 Households of Huong Hoa District by Ethnic Group and Commune 2018 ................................... 269
Figure 8.28 Local Road in Huong Hoa District ................................................................................................ 270
Figure 8.29 Passenger and Freight Transport Volume of Huong Hoa District 2010-2019............................... 270
Figure 8.30 Land Use Structure of Huong Hoa District 2018 .......................................................................... 272
Figure 8.31 Livestock of Huong Hoa District 2010-2019 ................................................................................. 273
Figure 8.32 Number of Schools, Classes, Teachers and Pupils of Huong Hoa District in the School Year 2018-
2019 ............................................................................................................................................. 274
Figure 8.33 Number of Villages with Special Difficulties of Huong Hoa District by Commune and Zone ........ 277
Figure 8.34 Number of Poor and Near Poor Households of Huong Hoa District 2015-2019 ........................... 277
Figure 8.35 Historical and Cultural Relics in Huong Hoa District ..................................................................... 280
Figure 8.36 Snapshot of Tan Lap commune ................................................................................................... 281
Figure 8.37 A Small Road in Bu Village, Tan Lap Commune .......................................................................... 282
Figure 8.38 Land Use Structure of Tan Lap Commune 2018 .......................................................................... 283
Figure 8.39 Local schools in Tan Lap Commune ............................................................................................ 284
Figure 8.40 Number of Schools, Classes, Teachers and Pupils of Tan Lap Commune in the School Year 2018-
2019 ............................................................................................................................................. 285
Figure 8.41 Religious Establishments in Tan Lap Commune .......................................................................... 286
Figure 8.42 Snapshot of Tan Lien Commune .................................................................................................. 287
Figure 8.43 Land Use Structure of Tan Lien Commune 2018 ......................................................................... 288
Figure 8.44 Number of Schools, Classrooms, Teachers and Pupils of Tan Lien Commune 2019 .................. 290
Figure 8.45 Local Schools in Tan Lien Commune ........................................................................................... 290
Figure 8.46 Health Station of Tan Lien Commune .......................................................................................... 291
Figure 8.47 The Memorial Stele House at the High Spot 689 in Tan Lien Commune ..................................... 292
Figure 8.48 Snapshot of Khe Sanh commune-level town ................................................................................ 293
Figure 8.49 Ethnicity in Khe Sanh Commune-level Town ............................................................................... 294
Figure 8.50 Buddhist Pagoda in Khe Sanh Commune-level Town .................................................................. 295
Figure 8.51 Local Infrastructure in Khe Sanh Commune-level Town .............................................................. 296
Figure 8.52 Land Use Structure of Khe Sanh Commune-level Town .............................................................. 296
Figure 8.53 Arabica Coffee Planting in Khe Sanh Town ................................................................................. 297
Figure 8.54 Lower Secondary School (left) and Primary School (right) in Khe Sanh ...................................... 298
Figure 8.55 Health Station in Khe Sanh Commune-level Town ...................................................................... 299
Figure 8.56 Khe Sanh Victory Monument........................................................................................................ 300

Figure 8.57 Snapshot of Huong Tan commune ............................................................................................... 301

Figure 8.58 Land Use Structure of Huong Tan Commune 2018 ..................................................................... 302
Figure 8.59 Different Campuses of Huong Tan Kindergarten ......................................................................... 305
Figure 8.60 Primary and Lower Secondary Schools in Huong Tan Commune ............................................... 305
Figure 8.61 Number of Schools, Classes, Teachers and Staff, and Pupils of Huong Tan Commune in the 2019-
2020 School Year ......................................................................................................................... 306
Figure 8.62 Health Station in Huong Tan Commune ....................................................................................... 307
Figure 8.63 Number of Poor Households of Huong Tan Commune 2015-2019 .............................................. 308
Figure 8.64 Memorial Stele at Peak 689 ......................................................................................................... 309
Figure 8.65 Project Affected Villages .............................................................................................................. 310
Figure 8.66 Surveyed Households and Population by Residence ................................................................... 315
Figure 8.67 Surveyed Population by Gender .................................................................................................. 316
Figure 8.68 Surveyed Households by Ethnicity ............................................................................................... 318
Figure 8.69 Scared Forests in Bu Village ........................................................................................................ 318
Figure 8.70 Surveyed Households by Religion ............................................................................................... 319
Figure 8.71 Surveyed Population by Age Group ............................................................................................. 320
Figure 8.72 Surveyed Population by Marital Status......................................................................................... 321
Figure 8.73 Surveyed Population by Educational Attainment .......................................................................... 322
Figure 8.74 Surveyed Population by Education Attainment and Gender ......................................................... 323
Figure 8.75 Surveyed Population by Working Age .......................................................................................... 323
Figure 8.76 Surveyed Labour Force by Livelihood and Gender ...................................................................... 325
Figure 8.77 Agricultural Production Area of Bu Village.................................................................................... 327
Figure 8.78 Agricultural Production Area of Tan Hao Village .......................................................................... 328
Figure 8.79 Main Agricultural Products among Surveyed Villages .................................................................. 330
Figure 8.80 Animal Husbandry in the Surveyed Villages ................................................................................. 332
Figure 8.81 Small Business Activities in Tan Hao Village ............................................................................... 335
Figure 8.82 Average Annual Household Income by Livelihood ....................................................................... 338
Figure 8.83 Annual Household Expenditure Structure .................................................................................... 339
Figure 8.84 Financial Support Sources of the Surveyed Households ............................................................. 340
Figure 8.85 Debt Sources of the Surveyed Households .................................................................................. 341
Figure 8.86 Number of Houses Owned by the Surveyed Households ............................................................ 343
Figure 8.87 Different Types of Houses Owned by the Surveyed Households ................................................. 344
Figure 8.88 House Types in the Surveyed Villages ......................................................................................... 345
Figure 8.89 Household Asset Items Owned by the Surveyed Households ..................................................... 346
Figure 8.90 Production Facilities Owned by the Surveyed Households .......................................................... 347
Figure 8.91 Drinking Water Sources of the Surveyed Households.................................................................. 348
Figure 8.92 Drinking Water Sources in the Surveyed Villages ........................................................................ 348
Figure 8.93 Cooking Energy Sources of the Surveyed Households ................................................................ 349
Figure 8.94 Firewood Use in the Surveyed Villages ........................................................................................ 349
Figure 8.95 Toilet Conditions among the Surveyed Households ..................................................................... 350
Figure 8.96 Frequency of Health Facilities Use over 12 Months among the Surveyed Households ............... 351
Figure 8.97 Common Diseases over the 12 Months among the Surveyed Population.................................... 352
Figure 8.98 Health Issues among the Surveyed Households over the Last 12 Months .................................. 352
Figure 8.99 Level of Satisfaction of Surveyed Households towards Public Infrastructure and Services ......... 354
Figure 8.100 Local Roads in the Surveyed Villages .......................................................................................... 355
Figure 8.101 Markets in Tan Lap Commune (left) and Tan Lien Commune (right) ........................................... 357
Figure 8.102 Project Information Channels ....................................................................................................... 359
Figure 8.103 Further Request for Project Information ....................................................................................... 359
Figure 8.104 Features Affected by the Project .................................................................................................. 360
Figure 8.105 Local Concerns Related to the Project Development ................................................................... 360
Figure 8.106 Perceptions of AHs towards DMS process ................................................................................... 362
Figure 8.107 Production Land Loss of Surveyed Households........................................................................... 364
Figure 8.108 Perceived Impact Significance on Household Livelihoods ........................................................... 365

Figure 8.109 Use of Compensation by the Land Affected Households ............................................................. 367
Figure 8.110 Vulnerable Households among the Surveyed Villages ................................................................. 370
Figure 8.111 Multiple Vulnerability of Surveyed Households ............................................................................ 370
Figure 8.112 Vulnerable Households by Category ............................................................................................ 371
Figure 8.113 Income Sources of Vulnerable Households ................................................................................. 371
Figure 8.114 Circles of Support by Vulnerable Group ....................................................................................... 372
Figure 8.115 Surveyed Population by Education Attainment and Gender ......................................................... 376
Figure 8.116 Surveyed Labour Force by Livelihood and Gender ...................................................................... 377
Figure 9.1 NML1 Background Noise Curve (Day-time) ................................................................................. 392
Figure 9.2 NML1 Background Noise Curve (Night-time) ............................................................................... 392
Figure 9.7 Worst-case and Operational Noise Contours of Lien Lap Project ................................................ 405
Figure 9.8 Predicted Wind Farm Noise Levels and Noise Assessment Criteria against (Hub Height) Wind
Speed for NSR 1 (which refers to Baseline Location NML 3) ....................................................... 406
Speed for NSR 2, and NSR 3 (which refer to Baseline Location NML 2) ..................................... 407
Speed for NSR 4 (which refers to Baseline Location NML 1) ....................................................... 408
Figure 9.11 Noise Sensitive Receptor No. 2 ................................................................................................... 409
Figure 9.12 Inside of Noise Sensitive Receptor No. 2 ..................................................................................... 410
Figure 9.13 Maps of Stream Traverse the Project Site.................................................................................... 414
Figure 9.14 Schematic Representation of Transmission Tower with Power Line Arrangement (for Transmission
Tower Used ACSR 300/39 Cable) ............................................................................................... 437
Figure 9.15 Electric Field Distribution for the Proposed Transmission Tower at 1 m above the Ground ......... 438
Figure 9.16 Magnetic Field Distribution for the Proposed Transmission Tower at 1 m above the Ground ...... 438
Figure 9.17 Magnetic Fields Comparison from Wind Turbines and 500 kV Power Lines with Common
Household Electrical Devices ....................................................................................................... 442
Figure 9.18 Location of Main Receptors .......................................................................................................... 452
Figure 9.19 Shadow Flickering Theory ............................................................................................................ 453
Figure 9.20 Map of Predicted Shadow Flicker (hours/year) – Worst Case Scenario ....................................... 457
Figure 9.21 Map of Predicted Shadow Flicker (minutes/day) - Worst Case Scenario ..................................... 458
Figure 9.22 Map of Predicted Shadow Flicker (hours/year) – Real Case Scenario ......................................... 460
Figure 9.23 Map of Predicted Shadow Flicker at Receivers No. 1966 to 1968 (hours/year) – Real Case
Scenario ....................................................................................................................................... 461
Figure 9.24 Map of Predicted Shadow Flicker at Receivers No. 1969 (hours/year) – Real Case Scenario .... 462
Figure 9.25 Map of Predicted Shadow Flicker at Receivers No. 1970 (hours/year) – Real Case Scenario .... 463
Figure 9.26 Map of Predicted Shadow Flicker at Receivers No. 1392; 1393; 1395 and 1403 (hours/year) – Real
Case Scenario .............................................................................................................................. 464
Figure 9.27 Environmental Setting at Shadow Receptors No. 1392; 1393; 1395 and 1403 ............................ 466
Figure 9.28 Environmental Setting at Shadow Receptor No. 1966 to 1968 .................................................... 467
Figure 9.29 Environmental Setting at Shadow Receptor No. 1969 ................................................................. 467
Figure 9.30 Environmental Setting at Shadow Receptors No. 1970................................................................ 468
Figure 9.31 Layout and Environmental Setting of the Receptor No. 1393 ....................................................... 468
Figure 9.34 Layout and Environmental Setting of the Receptor No. 1403....................................................... 470
Figure 9.35 Layout and Environmental Setting of the Receptor No. 1966 and 1967 ....................................... 470
Figure 9.36 Layout and Environmental Setting of the Receptor No. 1968....................................................... 471

Figure 9.39 Viewshed (20 km buffer) .............................................................................................................. 479

Figure 9.40 Visual Sensitive Receptors Location ............................................................................................ 481
Figure 9.41 Lien Lap Wind Farm Transportation Route .................................................................................. 514
Figure 10.1 Area of Influence of Social Impact ................................................................................................ 520
Figure 10.2 Land Use Classification and Location of Affected Households .................................................... 526
Figure 10.3 National Road No. 9 (left) and Project Access Road under Construction (right) .......................... 537
Figure 10.4 NTFP Collection Area of Bu Villagers........................................................................................... 549
Figure 11.1 Impact Zone of Theoretical Blade Throw ...................................................................................... 572
Figure 12.1 Six-step Process .......................................................................................................................... 578
Figure 12.2 Existing and Planned Wind Power Developments in the Immediate Region ................................ 581
Figure 12.3 Ethnic Proportion of Affected Communes .................................................................................... 598
Figure 12.4 Number of Villages with Special Difficulties of Affected Communes ............................................ 599
Figure 12.5 Current Number of Poor and Near-Poor Households of Affected Communes ............................. 599
Figure 13.1 Structures of PCC1 Management for Three Wind Farms (Lien Lap, Phong Huy and Phong
Nguyen) at Corporate Level, Site Level and Subcontractors in Construction Phase .................... 606
Figure 13.2 Structures of PCC1 Management for Three Wind Farms (Lien Lap, Phong Huy and Phong
Nguyen) at Corporate Level, Site Level and Subcontractors in Operation Phase ........................ 607

Acronyms and Abbreviations

Name Description
AoI Area of Influence
BaU Business as Usual
CMS Central Monitoring System
CO2 Carbon Dioxide
CSR Compensation, Support and Resettlement
DMS Detailed Measurement Survey
DoNRE Department of Natural Resources and Environment
DWT Deadweight tonnage
EAAA Ecological Appropriate Area for Analysis
EHS Environmental, Health and Safety
EIA Environmental Impact Assessment
EOR Energy Outlook Report
EPC Engineering, Procurement, and Construction
EPFIs Equator Principle Financial Institutions
EPP Environmental Protection Plan
EPs Equator Principles
ERM Environmental Resources Management
ESMP Environment and Social Management Plan, Health and Safety
FGD Focused Group Discussion
GDP Gross Domestic Product
GHG Greenhouse Gas
GIIP Good International Industry Practice
Hz hertz
IA Impact Assessment
IESE Initial Environmental and Social Examination
IFC International Finance Corporation
IFC PS International Finance Corporation – Performance Standard
ISO International Organisation for Standardisation
IUCN International Union for Conservation of Nature
kg kilogram
km kilometre
kV Kilovolt
LEP Law on Environment Protection
m metre
m/s metre per second
m2 square metre
MoNRE Ministry of Natural Resources and Environment
MW megawatt

OHS Occupational Health and Safety

POP Persistent Organic Pollutants
RE Renewable Energy
SCADA Supervisory Control and Data Acquisition
SEA Strategic Environmental Assessment
SPS Safeguard Policy Statement
TCFD Task-force on Climate-related Financial Disclosures
TPES Total Primary Energy Supply
UNFCC United Nation Framework Convention on Climate Change
VNRB Vietnam Red Data Book
WPP Wind Power Project

INITIAL ENVIRONMENTAL AND SOCIAL EXAMINATION REPORT EXECUTIVE SUMMARY
EXECUTIVE SUMMARY
This Initial Environment and Social Examination (IESE) presents an assessment of the potential
environment and social impacts of a proposed 48MW wind power development in Tan Lap and Tan
Lien Communes, Huong Hoa District, Quang Tri Province, Vietnam.
Lien Lap Wind Power Project will be developed and operated by Lien Lap Wind Farm Joint Stock
Company (hereafter as “Lien Lap JSC”). PCC1 is the major shareholder who contributes 55% of total
investment to Lien Lap JSC. The location and components of the Project is shown in the figure below:
Figure 0.1 Project Location

The Project comprises twelve (12) 4 MW wind turbine generators (WTGs) with total installed capacity
of 48MW and associate infrastructure including: 10,330m overhead and underground 35kV
transmission line. The construction of the Project has been commenced in May 2020 and expected to
commence its commercial operation in Quarter 3 of 2021.
Lien Lap Wind Power Project has received approval for Feasibility Study and the local Environmental
Protection Plan (EPP) in 2020. The IESE aimed to assess the Project-related impacts regarding to
environmental and social aspect against ADB Safeguard Policy Statement (ADB SPS, 2009), ADB
Social Protection Strategy (2001), ADB Gender and Development Policy (1998), JICA’s Environmental
and Social Guidelines and associated World Bank Environmental, Health and Safety (EHS) Guidelines.
The IESE is prepared based on:
(i) information provided by Client such as Feasibility Study, Site Investigation Report, Wind
Measuring report, local EPP;
(ii) desktop review of reliable sources; and
(iii) additional primary baseline survey to collect data from socio-economic surveys of affected
communities, noise and physical environmental baseline monitoring within and around the
www.erm.com Version: Final 14 May 2021 Page 22

Project area and biodiversity surveys (including bird, bat, terrestrial fauna and flora
surveys).
The outcomes of the IESE, including mitigation measures and monitoring are summarized in the
Environmental and Social Management Plan (ESMP). The ESMP will combine the mitigation and
monitoring requirements identified in the local EPP and the IESE to provide an overview of future
environmental and social commitments of this Project.
The IESE is comprised of three volumes (herein 13 chapters), including:
Volume 1: Introduction to describe the Project Description with detailed information of its component
and area; Project Alternatives to discuss alternatives in term of power generation type, site selection
and technology; applicable regulations and international standards, methodology used for the impact
assessment and the scope of the IESE report.
Volume 2: Baseline Information to provide adequate environmental, biodiversity and socio-economic
baseline information to identify key issues, and to present the outcomes of the stakeholder engagement
process during the initial IESE development.
Volume 3: Impact Assessment to assess the potential impacts and consequences related on each of
the key receptors within the area. The assessment also identifies the significance of impacts based on
the existing controls in place and recommends additional mitigation measures and monitoring to satisfy
ADB SPS and other International Guidelines.
Project Categorization
Environment
Environmental impacts of the Project during the construction phase will increase noise level, changes
in air quality, impacts on water quality, impacts on soil erosion, terrestrial ecology, community health
and safety, occupational health and safety, etc. and operational impacts on water quality that relates
mainly on residual impacts from construction, impacts from shadow flicker, traffic impacts, birds/ bats
impacts. Most of these impacts are limited to the wind farm components and their immediate vicinity
and can be minimized through application of mitigation measures as proposed in the ESMP. As such
the environmental impact of the Project is categorized as B.
Involuntary Resettlement
The resettlement of the Project is government-led and involuntary process with gaps against ADB
Safeguard Requirement (SR) 2. A Land Acquisition Audit report was conducted for the Project to identify
and analyse the gaps. Total number of economically affected households by the Lien Lap Project is 100
households; in which the number of households losing 10% production land or more is 22 households
(120 people). It was also confirmed that there was no physical displacement for this Project. The Project
is classified as Category B as per ADB SPS SR 2 for Involuntary Resettlement.
Indigenous Peoples
The Project is assessed to have limited impacts on Indigenous Peoples (Van Kieu people), i.e. Category
B. As such, as required by ADB, a Livelihood Restoration and Ethnic Minorities Development Plan
(LREMDP) was developed to address the gaps associated with the involuntary resettlement and the
and the adverse and beneficial impacts on Indigenous Peoples.
Environmental Context
Lien Lap Wind Power Project is located in the Western and North-western part of Quang Tri province
and situated in low-hilly areas that are sloping from Southwest to Northeast. The area has an elevation
from 450 – 520 m above sea level. Ta Nong stream traverses the Project site that joins the Tan Tai
stream, meandering south of the Project area. Baseline monitoring of physical environment condition
showed that ambient environmental quality (air, noise, fresh water ground water, sediment, and soil) is
relatively within the allowable standards of Vietnamese National Technical regulations.

The Project footprint is located in modified habitat including agricultural land (41.6%) and bare land of
production forest (58.4%). The density of vegetation is considered low that is dominated mainly by
mixed plantation area and acacia hybrid plantation. Only a small portion of the the 35 kV transmission
line footprints outside of the Project’s boundary footing passes through the protection forest.
Social Context
The Project’s main components are located in the two communes of Tan Lap and Tan Lien of Huong
Hoa District, Quang Tri Province, Vietnam. This is a mountainous area with low population density.
Agriculture and forestry land comprise nearly 80% of the land use in the district. At the time of the IESE
development, land at the Project site area are mainly utilized for agricultural production, including annual
crops (coffee, cassava, rice, and banana) and perennial crops (acacia). No households are located on
the Project site.
The directly affected communes are home to two ethnic grou ps including Kinh and Van Kieu people.
Based on the social assessment, the Van Kieu ethnic minority meets the criteria in ADB’s SPS SR 3 to
be considered as Indigenous Peoples.
Impact Assessment
A summary of the outcomes of the impact assessment for each environmental and social aspect
identified in the Scoping Study are summarized in table below. A brief description of each aspect is
provided hereafter.

Key Impacts ADB Applicable Phase Significance of Impacts

Standards
Before Mitigation With mitigation
Environmental Impacts
Air quality SR 1 Construction Low risk / Medium risk Minor
Noise SR 1 Construction Moderate Minor
Operation Minor Negligible
Water resource competition SR 1 Construction Minor Minor
Water quality SR 1 Construction Moderate Minor
Soil Compaction and Erosion SR 1 Construction Moderate Minor
Soil Contamination SR 1 Construction Minor Minor
Operation Moderate Minor
Direct Loss of Terrestrial habitat SR 1 Construction Moderate Minor
Disturbance of displacement impacts on terrestrial fauna SR 1 Construction Minor Minor

species
Barrier creation, fragmentation and edge effects - SR 1 Construction Minor/ Moderate Minor
Terrestrial
Degradation of Habitat impacts SR 1 Construction Moderate Minor
Mortality impacts - birds SR 1 Operation Minor Minor
Mortality impacts - bats SR 1 Operation Minor Minor
Impacts of Project’s activities to Climate change SR 1 Construction Not significant Negligible
Impacts of Climate change to the Project SR 1 Operation Moderate Minor
Traffic Density and Road Infrastructure SR 1 Construction Minor Minor
Traffic Safety SR 1 Construction Moderate Minor
Electromagnetic Interference (Overhead Line) SR 1 Operation Minor Negligible


Standards
Electromagnetic Interference (Underground Line) SR 1 Operation Minor Negligible
Electromagnetic Interference (Wind turbine) SR 1 Operation Negligible Negligible
Shadow flicker impacts SR 1 Operation Moderate Minor
Visual impacts SR 1 Operation Negligible/ Minor/ Moderate Minor
Social Impacts
Economic displacement and Loss of Livelihoods SR 2 Construction Moderate Minor
Disturbance to agriculture production SR 2 Construction/ Operation Minor Negligible
Community Health, Safety and Security impacts during SR 1 Construction Moderate Minor
Construction
Impacts Associated with Construction Workers SR 1 Construction Moderate Minor
Benefit to local community Construction/ Operation Positive Positive
General disturbance to local community SR 2 Operation Minor Negligible
Gender ADB Gender and Construction/ Operation Minor Minor

Development Policy
(1998); ADB SPS
Indigenous Peoples SR 3 Construction/ Operation Moderate Minor
Unplanned Event (Risk Assessment)
Leakage and spill Construction (Worker and Moderate Minor

Communities)
Construction (Environment) Moderate Minor
Operation (Communities Moderate Minor

and Environment


Standards
Traffic Accidents Construction (Workers and Major Major

Communities)
Fire and explosion Construction (Workers and Major Minor

Communities/Environment)
Operation (Workers and Major Minor

Communities)
Operation (Environment) Moderate Minor
Transmission line snapping and transmission pylon Operation (Workers and Major Moderate
collapse Communities)
Blade throw Operation (Workers and Major Major

Communities)
Operation (Environment) Moderate Minor
Natural Hazards Construction/Operation Major Moderate

(Workers and Communities/
Environment)

 Ambient Air: Air emission from land clearing and preparation, construction of access road and
internal road, turbine foundations, transmission line pylons, traffic movement for material transport
during construction phase have low risk on human health impact and medium risk on ecological
impact on the project area and surrounding area. With implementation of recommended mitigation
measures, air emission impacts will be reduced to minor.
 Noise: The noise impacts during the construction phase are assessed to be Moderate given noise
level from construction equipment/ heavy-duty vehicle and traffic to the nearest receptor is met the
criteria threshold of international and national guidelines. Construction noise levels will be reduced
to Minor with the successful implementation of mitigation measures such as ensuring equipment
in good condition, movements of vehicles are optimised and restricting night-time construction.
Whilst the approach to assessing the operational noise is using noise model to predict wind farm
noise levels at sensitive receptors that is based on ISO 9613-2:1996. During operation phase with
the results of predicted noise level generated by the proposed wind turbine model merely equals
to background noise at monitored receptors at normal wind breeze (6 m/s), however, the modelling
results indicated that nighttime noise may exceed IFC EHS General Guidelines at wind speed
above 8 meters per second, this operational noise effect is considered as Minor as it is not
expected to occur frequently based on the wind data available. Vesta’s also has sound optimizing
mode function to reduce noise level, and risks to be Negligible.
 Shadow Flicker Impact: The impact of shadow flicker during operation phase is considered to be
Moderate as the Project locates at close proximity with residential areas. Based on real case
scenario modelling, out of nine receptors, there are five dwellings were identified and will
experience shadow flickering from nearest turbines. However, given the building structure and
existing surrounding vegetation of such receptors including periodical monitoring, engagement and
assessment as part of mitigation measures, the impact is likely to be reduced to be at acceptable
level. The five affected households were offered to be relocated but chose to stay in their current
dwellings. The relocation option will remain to be available to them in case they choose to relocate
once operations starts.
 Water resource: The assessment has considered the potential effects of the Project on surface
and ground water resources. There is one natural stream traverses through the Project site, namely
Ta Nong stream. Ta Nong stream also supports the local community as a source of water supply.
However, the Project will source water by procuring water from Khe Sanh Water Supply Company
to supply 30 m3 of water per day. The worker’s domestic water requirement will be sourced from
groundwater. The impact on water resource conflict caused by Project’s activities is considered as
Minor. Regarding water quality, the social baseline survey identified that the water quality of
stream/creeks have recently affected by agricultural activities with pesticides and their residues. It
is predicted that Project construction activities will result in impact on water quality such as pollution
incidents, erosion and sedimentation. The impact on water quality is considered as Moderate.
Through the adoption of mitigation measures on site mentioned in ESMP, the potential effects on
the water environment will be mitigated and reduced to Minor impact.
 Soil environment: The assessment has considered the potential effects of the Project’s activities
on soil environment in term of soil compaction, erosion and soil contamination. Soil erosion is
predicted as Moderate of impact significance due to large amount of excavated soil, of which only
6.0% will be reused for ground levelling. Improper management of excavated materials might
potentially result in increased sediment in surface runoff and localised soil erosion to downstream
water bodies and farms nearby the Project. Regarding Soil contamination, there is potential impact
on changes in soil quality due to accidential fuel spill/leaks and worker’s activities such as disposal
of waste material and domestic effluents on soil of the surrounding area. With effective control in
place such as portable toilets installation and effective waste collection and management, the
impact of soil contamination due to improper waste disposal and leaks/spills is Minor. Through the
adoption of mitigation measures on site mentioned in ESMP, the potential effects on the soil
environment will be mitigated and reduced to Minor impact for both.

 Traffic and Transport: The assessment has considered the potential effects of construction traffic
on the road network within the vicinity of Lien Lap Wind Farm. The assessment is based on the
number of daily movements of heavy and non-heavy good vehicles. With the amount of equipment,
materials and fuel needed to transport, around eight movements per day is anticipated. The main
transportation route is National Road No. 9, which is currently lightly trafficked. Given good practice
and existing/ in-place control measures, Project impacts to traffic density and road infrastructure
as a result of increased vehicle movement during the construction phase were assessed as being
Minor. In addition, considering substantially higher truck traffic volumes and oversized loads could
result in hazards for residents and drivers who are unaccustomed to slow manoeuvring of oversize
vehicle in mountainous area. The impact on traffic safety is considered as Moderate. Prior to the
commencement of construction, a detailed Traffic Management Plan (TMP) will be developed
which provides details on a range of traffic management measures including timing and routeing
of vehicles movements with the aim of reducing the effect of construction to be Minor for both traffic
safety and traffic density and road infrastructure.
 Avifauna: the operation of wind turbines potentially poses the collision risk to various bird and bat
species, especially whose flights took place in Rotor Swept Zone (RSZ) (30m-180m). All bird
species recorded in RSZ are listed as Least Concern in IUCN Red List and Not Listed in Vietnam
Red Data Book. There are no restricted-range species and the EAAA appears not to support
globally significant concentrations of migratory species. The mortality risks of birds due to collisions
is considered Moderate as 49% of the birds recorded, of LC status, have flight heights which fall
within the RSZ. Turbines will be prevented from freewheeling during operations to reduce risk for
these species. Regarding bat, interview and survey indicated that small colonies of frugivorous
insectivorous bats can roost in a few huts or hollow trees/foliage in orchid gardens/plantations.
Shield-nosed Leaf-nosed Bat (Hipposideros scutinares) [IUCN VU] was detected during field
survey that is restricted-range species with Extent of Occurrence has been estimated
approximately 39,000km 2. The species appears to fly and forage under the canopy. Furthermore,
the collision risk of this species is considered Low. Non-volant mammal and herpetofauna found
within the Project area are not species of conservation interest. The project is unlikely to adversely
affect these species. The wind turbines will be equipped with monitoring and deterrent system to
reduce impacts.
 The Ecologically Appropriate Area for Analysis (EAAA) does not contain Critical Habitat. The
flora species were found within the Project area is common excepting for three individuals of Burma
Padauk (Pterocarpus macrocarpus) which is listed as Endangered in IUCN Red List and Vietnam
Red Data Book.The ESMP includes measures to minimize impact to these individuals. These have
not been included in the vegetation cleared for the project.
 Land Acquisition and Economic Displacement: The Project development required production
forest and agriculture land from organization, households and individual from Bu, Tan Thuan and
Tan Tai villages of Tan Lap commune, Tan Hao village of Tan Lien commune, Tan Vinh village of
Huong Tan commune, and Residential Group No. 7 of Khe Sanh Town. 100 households were
identified as economically displaced by the Project, among whom, 22 households with 120 people
lose from 10% of their production land. No physical displacement occurred. Land acquisition
followed the Government-led process. Key impacts are associated with the land-based livelihood
of the displaced households and assessed as Moderate. Short-term disturbance to agriculture
production in the neighbourhood is also expected at Minor significance. In order to mitigate these
impacts, a Livelihood Restoration and Ethnic Minority Development Plan (LREMDP) and
Stakeholder Engagement Plan (SEP) including Community Grievance Mechanism have been
developed. With implementation of the recommended mitigation measures, the residual impacts
are expected to remain Minor and Negligible, respectively.
 Community health and safety: the Project is likely to employ approximately 92 workers, at the
peak time of the construction phase. Of which, only 18% of construction workers are local labourers
Half of migrant construction workers are expected to stay offsite in either temporary worker

accommodation or local boarding houses. This is predicted to result in potential conflict and tension
due to the difference in culture and living style between two groups. Therefore, the impacts on the
community health and safety are considered moderate during construction but they will be reduced
to minor with implementation of mitigation measures including Labor Management Plan.
 Economic Impacts: Positive economic impacts are expected to local employment and
procurement during the construction phase, and impacts on the local economy relating to tax
revenue, local employment and tourism development during operation phase. With the application
of measures to optimise these benefits such as adopting specific procurement policies and hiring
protocols and priorities, the positive impacts on local people in Huong Hoa district will be enhanced.
 Indigenous Peoples: Potential impacts on the Van Kieu ethnic minority include the loss of
livelihood and income from land, and potential for social conflicts among the community as a result
of influx of labor and other economic migrants. Although the scope of land acquired from the Van
Kieu people is quite limited, the ethnic minority is assessed as dependant on land-based livelihood,
hence the impact is of moderate significance. An LREMDP was developed and will be implemented
as a key mitigation measure and as a means to enable IPs to access Project benefits.
 Gender: Project will likely pose negative impacts on women’s livelihoods and health condition due
to their more vulnerable status than men. Such impacts will be most significant during the
construction phase, and its consequence will last for long-term. Gender impacts on the Van Kieu
ethnic minority women is assessed as of higher significance than the Kinh. Gender mainstreaming
measures were emphasized in all of the Project’s social management plans to ensure women’s
participation and benefits from all of Project’s activities. The project is also classified as effective
gender mainstreaming and a separate Gender Action Plan was prepared.
 Unplanned events: Unplanned events such as Leakage and Spill incidents, Traffic accidents, Fire
and Explosion, Blade Ejection Failure, Transmission Line snapping and Transmission Pylon
Collapse, Natural Hazards will have potential impact ranging from Major to Minor on the
environment and community upon their likelihood of occurrence and consequence. While these
events are infrequent, mitigation measures have been identified and recommended accordingly.
 Cumulative impacts: Cumulative impacts associated with existing and near future neighbouring
projects will likely be experienced during the construction and operation phases of the Project,
including Noise impacts, Bird and Bat strike and habitat loss; Economy and employment; Local
Community Livelihood; Community health and safety; Infrastructure and public services; Traffic;
and Indigenous Peoples. Cumulative environmental impacts on migratory birds in the area will
become a concern when additional wind farms are developed in the area. The cumulative impacts
on visual amenity unlikely generate, so it is considered as Minor. Cumulative social impacts are
mostly considered as Small scale negative.
In conclusion, the construction and operation of the Project will have environmental and social impacts
of Minor to Moderate significance prior to mitigation. With implementation of the mitigation measures,
the residual impacts are considered to be reduced to Negligible to Minor.
To manage and mitigate such impact, the ESMP has been prepared. The ESMP should be read with
reference to this IESE. As part of this report, a range of measures including specific environmental,
health safety and social management plans have been developed to reduce the overall impacts to
acceptable levels and as low as reasonably practicable to ensure compliance with Project Applicable
Standards.

INITIAL ENVIRONMENTAL AND SOCIAL EXAMINATION REPORT INTRODUCTION
1. INTRODUCTION
1.1 Purpose of this Report

This Initial Environmental and Social Examination (IESE) presents an assessment of the potential
environmental and social impacts associated with the proposed Lien Lap Wind Power Project in
Vietnam.
ERM Vietnam (ERM) was commissioned by Power Construction JSC No.1 (hereinafter as “PCC1” or
“Client”) to undertake an IESE of the Lien Lap Wind Power Project. The purpose of the IESE is to inform
PCC1 and their Project partners of the environmental and social impacts associated with the Project
and in particular the extent to which the Project aligns with the expectations of the Asian Development
Bank (ADB) Environmental Assessment Guidelines and associated World Bank Group Environmental,
Health and Safety (EHS) Guidelines.
The IESE assesses the environmental and social impacts based on the agreed scope of baseline data
collection and impact assessment and preludes the preparation of an Environmental and Social
Management Plan (ESMP).
1.2 Project Background

Power Construction JSC No.1 (hereinafter as ”PCC1”) was established in 1963, experienced more than
50 years of construction and development in a number of different sectors such as power construction,
energy investment, industrial manufacturing, consultancy and services. PCC1 has already
commissioned three wind power projects located in Quang Tri Province with a total capacity of 144MW.
For the execution and operation of three wind power projects, PCC1 established three organizations
which are known as “Lien Lap Wind Farm Joint Stock Company”, “Phong Huy Wind Farm Joint Stock
Company” and “Phong Nguyen Wind Farm Joint Stock Company”.
Lien Lap Wind Power Project will be developed and operated by Lien Lap Windfarm Joint Stock
Company (hereafter as “Lien Lap JSC”). PCC1 is the major shareholder who contributes 55% of total
investment to Lien Lap JSC. The other shareholders are Renova contributing 40% of total investment
and the minor shareholders contributing about 5% of total investment. The Project turbine area is
located in Tan Lien and Tan Lap Communes, Huong Hoa District, Quang Tri Province. The Project has
been approved and supplemented into the Provincial’s development plans under Decision No.
4939/QD-BCT dated 27th December 2018 by Ministry of Industry and Trade as well as got the Approval
of Intention of Investment as stated in Decision No. 254/UBND-CN dated on 02 Feb 2021 by Quang Tri
Province People’s Committee (PPC). Lien Lap JSC completed Feasibility Study Report in 2020.
According to the Project’s various technical documents and confirmation by Lien Lap JSC, the Project’s
study area1 will cover an area of 424 ha. The Project’s key components are presented in Table 1.1 and
Figure 1.1.
Table 1.1 Project’s Components
No. Facilities Number Total Capacity/ Length (m)/ Area (ha)
Permanent Facilities
1 Wind Turbine Generator 12 48 MW
2 35 kV Transmission line 1 10,330 m
1
Project’s study area/ project area means all land within the Specific Plan boundary that is: (1) owned by Developer or in which
Developer has an equitable interest, and (2) owned by Province/ City that will be transferred to Developer. Meanwhile, project
footprint means the limits of all grading and ground disturbance, including landscaping, associated with a project and
undeveloped areas inside the Project’s boundaries.

No. Facilities Number Total Capacity/ Length (m)/ Area (ha)
3 Internal road 1 7,284 m
Ancillary Facilities
1 Laydown area and Crane installation area 13 14.4 ha
2 Worker camp during the construction 2 50 people
3 Batching plant 2 60 m3/hr
4 Spoil disposal site 10 11.14 ha
1,018 m;
Access road - Existing road to be upgraded
5 1 Required land area for the expansion:
and expanded
1ha
Shared Facilities
Shared with Huong Tan and Tan Linh

1 35/110kV Huong Tan substation 1
projects owned by Phu Dien JSC
3.5 km
2 110kV Transmission line 1
Shared with Huong Tan project
3 Operation house 1 Shared with Phong Nguyen Project
Figure 1.1 Project Location

Figure 1.2 Ancillary Facilities of the Project
Figure 1.3 Laydown Area of the Project

According to Letter No. 1412/UBND-KT&HT dated 16 November 2020, the existing inter-village road
(1,018 m length) is proposed to expand as per the commune’s New Rural Development Program2. This
access road expansion is also going to serve the Lien Lap Project, as such, Lien Lap JSC proposed to
provide financial support for this access road expansion. From ADB’s perspective and consistent with
guidance from ADB’s Environment Sourcebook, the access road is considered as an ancillary facility of
the project because its expansion is necessary in order to bring in equipment and construction materials
and will be actively used by Lien Lap project during the construction phase. This route is chosen after
an alternatives analysis because it provides benefit to both the Project and the communities. It is a
much-awaited community infrastructure, which will promote the economic development of the Tan Lap
commune. It should be noted, however, that from the project’s perspective:
 The access road is expanded for the main purpose of socio-economic development support in Tan
Lap commune;
 This access road will still be expanded even without the Project;
 This access road will be handed over and will be fully managed by the government once the
expansion is completed.
Regarding the 35/110kV Huong Tan substation, Lien Lap JSC signed a Lease Contract with Phu Dien
JSC. for the 110 kV transmission line and 35/110 kV Huong Tan substation usage. Lien Lap JSC does
not involve in any development activities of the 110 kV transmission line and 35/110 kV Huong Tan
substation. As such, these facilities are supposed to be scope out of the IESE.
1.3 Environmental and Social Impact Assessment Objective

The objective of this IESE is to assess potential impacts of the wind power project on the environment,
cultural heritage and socio-economic development of affected areas, and to propose measures in order
to avoid, reduce or mitigate negative impacts against the applicable standards to support PCC1’s
application for finance from International Lenders.
1.4 Scope of Baseline and Impact Assessment
Table 1.2 Scope of Baseline and Impact Assessment
Topic Scope of Impact Assessment
Baseline survey
Flora and fauna species Undertake desktop assessment and terrestrial flora and fauna surveys to map
survey the distribution and composition of vegetation and species. Flora and fauna
surveys will be conducted over a single season.
Seasonal vantage point and Undertake two seasonal land-based vantage point bird surveys and bird
transect survey for avifauna transect survey
Bat screening and field Undertake a comprehensive desktop study and two seasonal field surveys of
survey the likely presence, abundance and distribution of bat species to
systematically assess the information on chiropteran fauna in the study area.
Socio-economic Baseline Complete primary data collection and analysis. Data to be collected during
Studies Socio-economic Baseline surveys includes socio-economic conditions in the
Project area, identify and understand the perceptions and concerns of
stakeholders (local authorities and local communities who might be affected
by the Project’s construction and operation activities);
2
Decision No. 1600/QD-TTg dated 16 August 2016 on approval of the National New Rural Development program in 2016-2020
(https://thuvienphapluat.vn/van-ban/van-hoa-xa-hoi/Quyet-dinh-1600-QD-TTg-chuong-trinh-muc-tieu-quoc-gia-xay-dung-nong-
thon-moi-2016-2020-320132.aspx)

Topic Scope of Impact Assessment

Undertake stakeholder engagement; and
Complete a household survey.
Noise Screening Study and Determine the baseline noise level of the project area in comparison with the
Assessment Noise Level Guidelines in IFC EHS Guidelines;
Develop project-specific operational noise models to calculate ISO 9613:2
wind farm noise levels; and
Compare resultant noise levels with project-specific criteria, identify any levels
that exceed thresholds and limits, and qualify the magnitude and extent of
any impacts.
Physical Environmental Undertake field survey and sampling of air, surface water, groundwater, soil.
Baseline Compare analytical results with national technical regulation of air, surface
water, groundwater and soil, identify any levels that exceed thresholds and
limits, and quantify the magnitude and extent of any impacts.
Impact Assessment
Air quality Emissions of NOx, SOx, PM, CO
Water resources Assess impacts on changes to physical, chemical or biological quality of

surface water bodies and changes in habitat quality, abundance, diversity
Soil Environment (Soil Assess impacts on Changes to physical and chemical soil properties
compaction and Soil
Contamination)
Biodiversity Assessment Determine the presence of IUCN Endangered or Critical Endangered species
and endemic or restricted range species;
Undertake an assessment of natural and modified habitats;
Determine key biodiversity values; and
Note any existing key threats to habitats and species.
Shadow Flicker Potential impacts on health of project-affected people (eyes, vision) and
vegetation growth
EMF Assess Impacts of potential of electromagnetic interference (EMI) which may

occur from the Project development
Visual Amenity Changes in the landscape, visual amenity in the presence of the Project
Social Impact Assessment Assess Impacts on Physical/ Economical Displacement, Economy and
Employment, Occupational and Community Health and Safety, Infrastructure
and Public services, Indigenous Peoples, Gender
Traffic Safety Changes in traffic volume contribute to increase risks of traveller safety,
especially the Project is located in a mountainous area.
1.5 Structure of the IESE

The structure and contents of the IESE are as follows:
Table 1.3 IESE Structure
Volume Chapter Chapter Title
Executive Summary

Volume Chapter Chapter Title
1 1 Introduction
2 Project Description
3 Administrative Framework
4 Impact Assessment Methodology
5 IESE Screening and Scoping
6 Stakeholder Engagement
2 7 Environmental Baseline
8 Social-economic Baseline
3 9 Environmental Impact Assessment
10 Social Impact Assessment
11 Unplanned Events
12 Cumulative Impact Assessment
13 Environmental and Social Management Plan
Appendices

INITIAL ENVIRONMENTAL AND SOCIAL EXAMINATION REPORT PROJECT DESCRIPTION
2. PROJECT DESCRIPTION
2.1 Project Alternatives

The ADB Safeguard Policy Statement (SPS, 2009) requires that the IESE shall identify and analyse
alternatives, including but not limited to project site location, design, technology and no project
alternative (which assumes that the Project development does not happen). This section provides an
analysis of certain alternatives to the Project development in relation to: (i) the Project layout design
and (ii) the alternatives for power generation.
2.1.1 No Project Scenario

Vietnam has large reserves of primary energy resources, such as coal, oil, natural gas, and water for
hydropower generation. It also has a high potential for renewable energy resources, such as biomass,
solar, and wind. During the period 2007-2017, Vietnamese total primary energy supply (TPES) grew at
4.7 % per annum. Hydropower experienced the highest growth at 14.5 % per annum, followed by coal
at 11.3 % per annum. The share of coal increased from the third largest fuel source in 2007 to the
largest in 2017. Meanwhile, the share of biomass fell from being the largest contributor in 2007 to the
third largest in 2017. Oil, growing at a rate of 4.3 % per annum, is the second largest fuel source. Solar
and wind have historically only contributed to a very small share in TPES. An overview of the progress
of the primary energy supply mix from 2007 to 2017 is presented in Figure 2.1.
Source: Vietnam Energy Outlook Report, 20193
Figure 2.1 Progress of Primary Energy Supply between 2007 and 2017
Figure 2.2 shows the predicted power generation make-up of Vietnam by fuel type to 2050. While this
shows a heavy reliance on coal fired power generation, it also shows the growth in supply by renewables
such as hydropower to remain relatively stable over that period.
3
https://ens.dk/sites/ens.dk/files/Globalcooperation/vietnam_energy_outlook_report_2019.pdf (Accessed on 9 April 9, 2020)

Figure 2.2 Total Primary Energy Supply (TPES) and RE Share in TPES across Analysed
Scenarios in the Period 2020-2050
The revised National Power Development Plan in the period 2011-2020 with the vision to 2030 and the
Renewable Energy (RE) Development Strategy together set relatively concrete directions for the
development of the power sector in the coming years. Regarding the primary energy mix per fuel type,
coal still covers the major part but tends to be stable in the following years of the planning period at the
proportion of 37.3 % in 2025 and 38.4 % in 2035. This is a result of applying low carbon policies to
promote RE development. Hydro power experiences a significant reduction while gasoline and oil
products cover over 20-22 % and natural gas accounts for about 11-13 % of the total primary energy.
The Energy Outlook Report (EOR) 2019 showed that the RE shares in TPES have a slightly decreasing
trend in future years, primarily due to a large increase in fossil fuel consumption. With the proposed
scenarios, the share of RE in the total primary energy supply could reach 21% in 2030, then increase
to 24% in 2050. This ratio is remarkably higher than the one under the Business as Usual (BaU)
scenario, but still fails to meet the required target in the RE Development Strategy (32% in 2030 and
44% in 2050).

Figure 2.3 Evolution of Total Final Energy Consumption (TFEC) by Sector in the Analysed
Scenarios in the Period 2020-2050
Figure 2.3 shows that wind and solar shares significantly increase across the scenarios, as they have
low operation and maintenance costs and no fuel costs. Additional analysis in EOR2019 showed that
with increasing wind and solar shares, the total energy system cost slightly increases while capital cost
increases rapidly. Therefore, in the transition from conventional power production to wind and solar, it
should take consideration of access to capital cost, even considering the expectation that the
investment costs of wind and solar will decrease drastically in the coming 30 years.
Financing of clean energy investments is a booming market, including in Vietnam. After 2030, with the
fossil fuels’ increasing price tendency, the investment cost of fossil fuel power sources will increase due
to stricter environmental standards while the power production cost of RE sources will fall as a result of
technology improvement. As a result, RE could be able to compete with traditional power sources.
Should the Project not proceed, power supply will continue to be met by other sources, however as
noted and the country continues to rely on fossil fuel generated power, particularly coal. In addition,
should the project not move forward, the significant positive economic and environmental benefits would
not be realized. Some benefits would be included in the following:
 Producing clean energy that contributing energy security through development of local energy
resources and decreasing dependency on traditional energy sources;
 The clean energy produced from renewable energy resources contributes to decrease global
warming due to the fact that it produces no greenhouse gas emission and reduces some types of
air pollution.
 During the construction and operation phase, the Project is expected to generate local employment
opportunities with approximately 20% local recruitment prioritising Van Kieu ethnic minority.
However, the local labours need to meet skill requirements from the Project. As such, this is

expected, to a certain extent, to subsequently enhance the socio-economic conditions and

standards of living of local community where the project will be developed.
 In the case of this Project, it is crucial to take consideration of positive environmental and social
impacts incurred from the project development, against negative impacts that anticipated at the
site-specific level. However, it could be concluded that the “no project” is not a preferable option.
2.1.2 Alternatives Methods of Power Generation

This section discussed several alternatives besides the development of a wind farm project. This mainly
includes other renewable energy alternatives suitable in general as well as other alternatives for power
generation such as conventional thermal power plants.
There are a range of power generation options potentially available and a summary of the advantages
and disadvantages of these options are provided in Table 2.1. Compared to most other traditional power
generation method, the wind power projects have a limited reversible impact on the environment and
contributing to reducing the production and use of energy from fossil fuels, which causes the increase
of greenhouse gas level and impacts on climate change. With a purpose to improve national electricity
demand in the coming years, the wind power method is selected for producing electricity to meet the
supply-demand balance of power resource.
The Project is currently consistent with the Vietnamese National Power Development Plan for the period
2011 – 2020 with the vision to 2030 (under Decision No. 428/QD-TTg, dated 18 March 2016), which
mostly focused on the renewable power development. The revised Power Development Plan VII
outlined a master plan for power source development, in which renewable energy (wind energy, solar
energy, bio energy) will be prioritized, so as to gradually increase the proportion of electricity generated
from Renewable energy sources. The key objective of the Project is to meet the supply-demand balance
of power resource by exploiting potential wind power for producing electricity in contribution to increase
environmental efficiency.

Table 2.1 Comparison of Power Generation Methods
System Advantage Disadvantage

Supercritical Thermal
■ Large-scale production potential ■ High fossil fuel consumption
Power
■ Moderate gestation period Wider distribution potential ■ Large quantities of water required for cooling
■ Provides cheap electricity to the consumer ■ High volume of emission from the operation
■ Provide stable output and reliable electricity on the grid ■ Accumulation of fly ash (in case of coal powered
installations)
■ Easily accessible and well established technology
■ Upstream impact from mining and oil exploration
■ Requires less land per Megawatt
Ultra Supercritical Thermal In addition to the above advantages: As above.
Power
■ Improved efficiency by reaching higher pressure and temperatures compared
to supercritical boilers.
■ Reduced emissions, particularly of CO and mercury.

■ The general rule of thumb is that each percentage point of efficiency
improvement yields 2–3% less CO.
■ Potentially lower operating costs

Hydropower
■ GHG emission estimated as low ■ Site specific, dependent on reservoir/ river
■ Do not create any waste by-products during the conversion process ■ Long gestation period
■ Some hydropower facilities can quickly go from zero power to maximum ■ Alteration of river flow regime
output. Because hydropower plant can generate power to the grid
■ Adverse social and ecological impacts due to inundation
immediately, they provide essential back-up power during major electricity
and downstream effects
outages or disruptions
Solar power
■ Pollution levels are insignificant ■ Large land requirement
■ Inexpensive power generation ■ Site-specific, dependent on solar insolation
■ Inexhaustible solar resource ■ Expensive installation
■ GHG emissions estimated as low

System Advantage Disadvantage
■ GHG emissions estimated as low as 8.2 g Ceq/kWh for the production chain.
Wind power
■ Pollution levels are insignificant ■ Large land requirement
■ Inexpensive power generation ■ Site-specific, dependent on wind pattern
■ Inexhaustible wind resource ■ Expensive installation
■ GHG emissions estimated as low ■ Impacts to Avifauna.
■ GHG emissions estimated as low as 2.5g Ceq/kWh for the production chain
Nuclear power
■ GHG emissions estimated as low ■ Availability of fuel source
■ Low fuel cost ■ Hazards associated with radioactive material
■ The production of electric energy is continuous. A nuclear power plant ■ High cost of project
generates electricity for almost 90% of annual time. It reduces the price
■ Disposal waste is expensive, as wastes are radioactive
volatility compared to other fuels
in nature
■ Do not emit smoke particles or gases
■ Long gestation period
■ Risk of fallout and meltdown scenarios and its impacts
on the local population and environment

2.1.3 Wind Turbines Layout Alternative

Based on the Feasibility Study Report, wind turbine layout was firstly identified optimal location by using
Optimize module in WindPro application. It also suggest that for safety, the minimum distance among
wind turbines is generally limited ranging from more than 2.5 times of rotor diameter (approximately 375
m) and shielding performance of 90% or more. Then, Project’s topographical map with a scale of 1:500
will be used to reconsider and rearrange turbine layout associate to the existing condition, transportation
routes to reach the highest annual energy production.
The Feasibility Study presented two alternatives of wind turbine layout. The option 1 of wind turbine
layout is presented in Figure 2.4 where the minimum distance of each turbine is about 417 m, while the
option 2 is designed with a turbine distance is at least 331 m (Figure 2.5). These two layouts are
compared in terms of electricity generation and efficiency which are calculated by WindPro Model
(Table 2.2) to ensure that:
 Maximize the Plant’s power output;
 Utilize the prevailing wind direction, wind speed, topography, geology and traffic in the areas; and
 Comply with Circular No. 32/2012/TT-BCT that requires plant efficiency to be above 90%.
Figure 2.4 Option 1 of Project’s Wind Turbine Layout

Figure 2.5 Option 2 of Project’s Wind Turbine Layout
Table 2.2 Calculated Annual Energy for Lien Lap Windfarm
Company Power Output Coefficient of Efficiency

(MWh/year) Performance (%)
Option 1 182,539.2 39.0 92.4
Option 2 201,072.3 43.0 92.3
Considering the results of calculated annual energy for Lien Lap Windfarm, the selected wind turbine
layout would be Option 2 due to some main reasons:
 Higher Coefficient of Performance (43.0%) than that of the Option 1
 Meet the requirement in Circular No. 32/2012/TT-BCT, which requires at least 90% wind efficiency;
and
 Shorter distance between wind turbines means the smaller area of land acquired for the Project
and shorter transmission lines between turbines.
2.2 Project Location

The Project’s footprint is located within a 39.71 ha area mainly in Tan Lap and Tan Lien Commune,
Huong Hoa District, Quang Tri Province (Figure 1.1). See Table 2.3 for the land area of the Project’s
components. The area is mainly high-mountainous with the elevation from 150 – 1000 masl.
Construction areas are located in the mountainous area to the west of Quang Tri province with the
elevation ranging from 450 – 520 masl. The Project is located in onshore area with high density
residential zone at the northeast to southeast section of the project area. Nearest residential zone is

approximately 300m away east of the project boundary. The Project’s component is connected to
National Road 9.
Land use in the Lien Lap Wind Power Project is dominantly agricultural land and bareland of production
forest. The total land area acquired for the development of the Project was presented in Table 2.3.

Table 2.3 Area of Land for the Project
S/N Facilities per Tenurial Instrument Land use type (ha)
Total Bare land (Production Agricultural Area Bare land (Protection

Forest) Forest)
I Fixed-term Land Use 11.64 4.5 7.102 0.038
1 Turbine foundation 1.8 1.2 0.6 -
2 TL 35KV tower 0.6 - 0.562 0.0384
3 Internal roads 9.24 3.3 5.94 -
II Temporary Land Use 14.4 10.5 3.9 -
1 Laydown area and Crane installation area 14.4 10.5 3.9 -
Subtotal of acquired land area (I+II) 26.04 15.0 11.002 0.038
III Rental land
1 Batching plant 0.9 0 0.9 -
2 Worker camp 0.63 0 0.63 -
3 Spoil disposal sites 11.14 0 11.14 -
Subtotal of rented land 12.67 0 12.67 -
IV Negotiated land transaction
1 Access road 1 0 1 -
2 Operational house (shared facilities) (area reflected in PN IESE) – 0.94
Subtotal of negotiated land 1 0 1 -
Grand Total 39.71 15.0 24.672 0.038
4
There are five 35kV tower footings inside the protection forest area

The physical surrounds of the Project are described below:

 To the North: Project is adjacent to Ri hill, Tan Lien commune area and located approximately 4km
from Phong Huy Wind Farm Project to northwest;
 To the East: Project is adjacent to Tan Lien commune;
 To the West: Project is adjacent to Tan Long commune and 5 km to the Vietnam – Laos border;
and
 To the South: Project is adjacent to Tan Lap commune.
The location of the Project area studied for this IESE, as well as the locations of its twelve wind turbines,
are presented in Table 2.4 and Table 2.5 respectively, as well as shown in Figure 1.1.
Table 2.4 Locations of Project’s Study Area
Landmark Coordinates (WGS 84)
Latitude (m) Longitude (m)
1 16.63864989 106.7028510
2 16.63075978 106.7065502
3 16.62292041 106.6884301
4 16.61762042 106.6972398
5 16.61360007 106.6963101
6 16.61625968 106.6839198
7 16.62049013 106.6829404
8 16.62068021 106.6806201
9 16.62424992 106.6770703
10 16.63476734 106.6857579
Source: EPP for Lien Lap Wind Farm, 2020
Table 2.5 Locations of Project’s Wind Turbines
Turbines Coordinates (WGS 84)
LL01 16.63358749 106.6982862
LL02 16.63164225 106.7018871
LL03 16.63491531 106.6894964
LL04 16.63211547 106.6926400
LL05 16.62934888 106.6928126
LL06 16.62778279 106.6953670
LL07 16.62521028 106.6783234
LL08 16.62333963 106.6805659
LL09 16.62105977 106.6820082
LL10 16.61987302 106.6846035

Turbines Coordinates (WGS 84)
LL11 16.61843189 106.6929136
LL12 16.61647198 106.6950052
Source: EPP Lien Lap Wind Farm, 2020
2.2.1 Wind Turbine Layout

All of the Project’s components, including the twelve wind turbines, are expected to be built on a
mountainous area in which two turbines are located in Tan Lien commune and the rest in Tan Lap
commune (approximately 4.5 km northwest of Khe Sanh town). The base elevation of the proposed
wind turbine locations ranges from 450 masl to 520 masl (see Figure 1.1).
2.2.2 35/110 kV Huong Tan Substation

35/110kV Huong Tan substation is located in Huong Tan commune, Huong Hoa district, Quang Tri
province (approximately 2.7 km north of the Project’s turbine area) (Figure 1.1). In the construction area
of the substation, terrain is relatively flat, hence, it is favourable for construction and materials
transportation. The substation was built by Phu Dien JSC and shared by three wind farms of Huong
Tan, Tan Linh and Lien Lap. Therefore, this substation is not included in the IESE scope of Lien Lap
Wind Power Project.
2.2.3 35 kV Transmission Line

According to the Technical Design, the 9,130 m 35 kV overhead transmission line will be connected via
towers to the 1,200 m 35kV underground cables that connect all turbines. The details of 35 kV
transmission line system are described below:
 The 35 kV 1-circuit transmission line will be divided into three (3) segments. The 366 m segment
will connect two (2) turbines LL01 and LL02. The 658 m segment will connect two (2) turbines LL03
and LL04. The 2,091 m segment will connect six (6) turbines LL07, LL08, LL09, LL10, LL11, and
LL12 inline;
 The 1,893 m 35 kV 2-circuit transmission line will connect the 658 m 35 kV 1-circuit segment and
the 35 kV 3-circuit transmission line heading to Huong Tan substation. It also directly connects two
(2) turbines LL05 and LL06;
 The 4,122 m 35 kV 3-circuit transmission line will lead to Huong Tan substation; and
 All turbines will be connected by 1,200 m 35 kV 3-circuit underground cables (100 m for each
turbine).
 The number of towers/ pylons which used for 35 kV overhead transmission line are 61 pylons of
which 46 and 15 towers/ pylons are located within and outside the project boundary, respectively.
Total length of the 35 kV transmission line outside of the project boundary is 3,511m.

Figure 2.6 35 kV Transmission Line in Lien Lap Wind Farm

The 35 kV overhead transmission line will run parallel to the internal road system which mostly passes
through plantation forest land, agricultural land, and a small protection forest land area.
There are 15 35 kV overhead transmission line pylons located outside the project boundary, in which
there are five pylons locating in bare land in protection forest land area managed by Dakrong Huong
Hoa Protection Forest Management Unit. Ten others are located in agricultural land.
2.3 Project Schedule

The Project started its construction in May 2020 and is expected to obtain Commercial Operation Date
(COD) in the Quarter 3 of 2021. The Project has been completed 28.26% of overall work by the end of
September 2020 and therefore a separate environmental and social compliance audit was prepared for
the Project in compliance with ADB SPS requirements. Accomplishments include completion of 50% of
T1-N1 route construction; 42.5% of N3-N6 route construction; and 20.8% of construction of turbine
foundation No.1, No.2, No.3.
The schedule for Project Implementation is shown in Table 2.6.
Table 2.6 Lien Lap Wind Power Project Schedule
No. Timeframe Activity

1 February 2020
■ Survey, set up Technical Design report and basic accounts.
– October
2020 ■ Approve the Technical Design report (e.g. turbine foundation, technical systems:
transportation, electricity, water) of the Project.
■ Complete legal procedures, acquire licenses, investment.

2 April 2020 –
■ Register land use rights and land compensation.
October 2020

No. Timeframe Activity
■ Approve and announce land compensation method.

■ Conduct land acquisition process and preparation of livelihood restoration and
ethnic minority development plan.
3 May 2020 –
■ Construct infrastructure.
July 2021
■ Import equipment and transport to site.
■ Construct the foundations of the wind turbines;
■ Install wind turbines.
4 May 2021 –
■ Commissioning.
August 2021
5 August 2021
■ Full operation
Source: Total Progress – Lien Lap Wind Farm Report, 2020
Table 2.7 Construction Milestone
No. Activity Timeframe Status as of 17 December 2020
1 Wind turbine foundation September 2020 – On-going

construction December 2020
2 Internal and access roads May 2020 – On-going

and crane yard construction December 2020
3 Construction of Apartment September 2020 – On-going

of Operational Management January 2021
Workers, including
warehouses and garden
4 Construction, installation, December 2020 – Not yet commenced

and calibration for the 35 kV February 2021
transmission line
5 Turbine installation March 2021 – Not yet commenced

August 2021
2.4 Project Facilities and Components

A process flow diagram of the Project indicating the main components is provided in Figure 2.7.

Figure 2.7 Flow Diagram of Project’s Power Production Process

Figure 2.8 illustrates the relationship between project’s components funded by ADB and project-related
components funded by other project owners.

Figure 2.8 Relationship between Project Components Funded by ADB and Other Project-
Related Components
2.4.1 Permanent Facilities
2.4.1.1 Wind Turbines

There are twelve wind turbine towers to be built, one for each turbine. The Project already signed the
turbine supply contract with Vestas. Detailed technical specifications of wind turbines are shown below.
For the wind turbines layout, refer to Section 2.2.1 and Figure 1.1.
2.4.1.1.1 Rotor
Table 2.8 Specifications of Rotor
Specifications Vestas V150-4.0MW
Turbine height (hub height including foundation) 105 m
Rotor Diameter 150 m
Tip Height 180 m
Number of wings 3
Rotor starts at wind speed 3 m/s
Wind speed reaches the rated capacity 20 m/s
Rotor stops (after 10 minutes) when wind speed reaches 24.5 m/s

2.4.1.1.2 Generator
Specifications
The rated power 4.0 MW
No. of WTGs 12
Total capacity 48 MW
Frequency 50/60 Hz
2.4.1.2 35 kV Transmission Line

The Project’s overhead 35 kV transmission line is newly built to connect 12 turbines to 110 kV Huong
Tan substation with a total of 61 towers/ pylons. Fifteen (15) towers/ pylons are located outside the
project boundary. The Huong Tan substation will be invested and built by Phu Dien JSC.
The 35 kV transmission line design is described in Section 2.2.3 and the total acquired land area for
the transmission line towers is presented in Table 2.3. The specification of 35 kV transmission line is
described as below table.
Table 2.9 Lien Lap Wind Farm 35kV Transmission Line’s Specification
Specifications
Length 9,130 m 35 kV overhead transmission line and 1,200 m for

underground cables connected from 35 kV transmission line
system to 12 turbines
Type Overhead and underground cables system
Application standards ICE 61089 or ASTM B498-98
No. of circuits 1 and 3
Diameter (mm) 9.1
Sheath for cable PVC
Installation Cables will be built on bearing frame, or inside siphon
2.4.1.3 Internal Road System

The 7,284 m bitumen internal road system within the Project area, connecting to turbine towers will be
newly built with the minimum width of 5.5 m; designed speed of 30 km/h5. In addition, the drainage
system will be built parallel with the internal road system. The run-off then enters the drainage system
and is discharged eventually to the nearby creeks. The drainage system will not discharge to
surrounding farms to prevent clogging these farms. Sediment controls will be installed to collect
sedimentand ensure that no sediment will be discharged to the creeks. Independent advisor will review
of the sediment controls’ design before the implementation. Total volume of excavation needed for
disposal of spoil, road and drainage system is 780,000 m3. The internal road is going to be used by
both the Project and the communities. The internal road system’s maintenance will be under the Project
owner’s responsibility. Design drawings of sediment controls can be referred to Appendix U.
5
Lien Lap Wind Project Accessed and Internal Road Design

Figure 2.9 Internal Road System of Lien Lap Wind Farm
2.4.2 Ancillary Facilities
2.4.2.1 Access Road System

Access to the Project site will be reached via inter- village road from National Road No.9 with the total
length of 1,018m. The existing inter-village road is a 2m – 3m width incomplete concrete road, mostly
red-earth road and currently being used by local farmers for transporting of agricultural products. This
existing inter-village road is being widened to 6m – 8m for serving the Lien Lap Project in the
construction phase then transfer to local authority (Tan Lap Commune) to fully manage once the access
road expansion is completed. Figure 2.10 shows the access road.

Figure 2.10 Access road of Lien Lap Wind Farm
2.4.2.2 Concrete Batching Plant

The turbine foundation will be constructed in steel reinforced concrete. There are two batching plants
with a capacity of 60 m3/hour each. Duration of the batch plant operation is four months and it will
require 15 liters of water per each cubic meter of concrete. Each turbine foundation needs an amount
of 600 m3 concrete and each cubic metre of concrete needs 200 kg cement. Hence, total cement
needed for each turbine foundation is 120 tonnes. The cement and the aggregates needed for concrete
manufacture will be provided by local suppliers and be delivered to site by road.
2.4.2.3 Laydown Area and Crane Installation Area

The Project has acquired through the government-led land acqsuition process a total of 14.4 ha of land
for laydown area which is used for the receipt, temporary storage, and the assembly of construction
equipment and other supplies. There is one laydown area located in Tan Tai village, Tan Lap commune
with the area of 5,300 m2 and twelve (12) other laydown areas correspondingly located at twelve
turbines where turbine components such as turbine blades and tower are laid down for wind turbine
installation. The locations of laydown areas are presented in Figure 1.3.
2.4.2.4 Worker Accommodation for the Construction Phase

There are two (2) worker accommodation areas which currently accommodates 50 people. This is
located near the outside laydown area where subcontractors (i.e. Song Da 5 and No. 384) companies’
workers stay during the construction phase. For more details about the location of worker camp relative
to the Project, see Figure 1.2.

2.4.2.5 Spoil Disposal Sites

Spoil disposal sites are areas where excavated soil are stockpiled. Portion of this soil is re-used for
backfilling in underground cable and turbine foundation construction activities while the rest will be kept
in the disposal area and rehabilitated or use for other purpose. There are ten (10) spoil disposal sites
in the Project site located along the internal road with total area of 11.14 ha. For details of the location
of spoil disposal sites, see Figure 1.2.
These spoil disposal sites are located in the leased land areas of 19 land users in Bu, Tan Thuan, Tan
Tai villages of Tan Lap Commune and Tan Hao village of Tan Lien Commune. Land lease contracts
were developed and signed between the Project and the land users.
According to Method Statement and design drawings for dumping sites, mitigation measures for
erosions (e.g. having a cut slope for every 6-8 m of height and provide a sediment fence and storm
water drains on dumping sites) and health and safety controls. The contractors are required to prepare
and submit the design drawing and construction method of the spoil disposal sites. Refer to Figure 2.11
and Figure 2.12 for layouts of ten (10) Spoil disposal sites at the Project. Details of Design Drawings of
Lien Lap spoil disposal site are described in Appendix Q.
Figure 2.11 Layout of Spoil Disposal Site of No.4, No.6 and No.6A

Figure 2.12 Layout of Spoil Disposal Site of No.8, 8A, 9,10,11,12 and 13
Figure 2.13 Photo of a Pre-disposed Spoil Disposal Site (taken by PCC1)

The drainage system on the surface of disposal site is designed with road and berm drainage ditches
along the toe of embankments. Sediment ponds are being installed to reduce runoff flow and control
sediment particles. Construction method for spoil disposal areas is described in Appendix R. A photo
of the existing spoil disposal site which was taken by the Project Sponsor in November 2020 is
presented below.

Figure 2.14 An Example for the Current Spoil Disposal Site
2.4.3 Other Components

 Wind monitoring system with meteorological sensors (speed, wind direction);
 Anti-lightning system;
 Earthing system;
 Communication system;
 Control system;
 Electricity metering system;
 Fire protection equipment for fire prevention; and
 Warning lights system.
Figure 1.2 shows the ancillary facilities of the Project.
2.4.4 Shared Facilities6
2.4.4.1 35/110 kV Huong Tan Substation

Specification of the 35/110 kV Huong Tan substation for Lien Lap Wind Farm is presented in Table
2.10.
6
Shared facilities are not Project’s components therefore outside of the scope of this IESE.

Table 2.10 Specification of 35/110 kV Huong Tan Substation
No. Item Specification
1 Capacity at 40 0C 63 MVA
2 Frequency 50Hz
3 Maximum operating voltage 123kV
4 Variable ratio 115±9 x 1.78% / 23/11kV
5 Balance roll 11kV/12MVA
6 Reactance ≥12.5%
7 Increase in wire temperature 65K
8 Increase in oil temperature 60K
9 Withstanding impulse voltage (1.2/50µs)
9.1 High pressure 550 kV
9.2 Low pressure 95 kV
9.3 Balanced pressure 75 kV
9.4 High-pressure neutral porcelain 230 kV
10 Withstanding impulse voltage (1min)
10.1 High pressure 230 kV
10.2 Low pressure 38 kV
10.3 Balanced pressure 28 kV
10.4 High-pressure neutral porcelain 115 kV
Source: Lien Lap Wind Power JSC, 2020.

The 35/110kV Huong Tan substation will be built by Phu Dien JSC and shared for three wind farms of
Huong Tan, Tan Linh and Lien Lap. Therefore, this substation is not included in the IESE scope of Lien
Lap Wind Power Project.
2.4.4.2 110kV Transmission Line

The 110 kV transmission line connected from 35/110 kV Huong Tan substation to 220 kV Lao Bao
substation is approximately 3.5 km and under construction, operation, and management of Huong Tan
Wind Farm Project; therefore, it is scoped out of this IESE.
2.4.4.3 Operation House

The operation house for Lien Lap project will be shared with Phong Nguyen and Phong Huy projects.
Phong Nguyen JSC already successfully negotiated with one land user in Cua village, Huong Tan
Commune, Huong Hoa District to receive the land use right transfer in August 2020, according to the
land use right transfer contract No. 35/HD-MB dated 15th August 2020. According to that, Phong Nguyen
JSC received the fully land use right of 9,407 m2 of land from a local land user. As confirmed by the
representatives of Lien Lap, Phong Huy and Phong Nguyen JSCs, the operation house will serve for
the operation phase of Lien Lap, Phong Huy, and Phong Nguyen Wind Farm projects.

Figure 2.15 Operation House’s Layout
2.5 Project Activities
2.5.1 Pre-construction Activities

The Pre-construction phase would include the following activities:
 Conduct some field surveys such as geotechnical survey, socio-economic survey, and
environmental survey;
 Preparation of the detailed design and layout of wind turbines within the Project site and other
infrastructure (substation, transmission lines, operation and maintenance facility, auxiliary works,
etc.);
 Land acquisition for clearance, by coordinating with local authorities to develop an appropriate
compensation plan;
 Geographic and topographic survey, geotechnical investigations and clearance of unexploded
ordnance (UXO); and
 Site clearance and levelling the ground.
2.5.2 Construction Activities

The construction phase will include the following activities:
 Construction/establishment of the cement batching plant;
 Construction of internal road to facilities and worksites; and
 Construction of turbine foundations and 35 kV transmission line;
- Transportation of wind turbines, construction material and machines;

- Installation of turbines, overhead transmission line/grid connection and underground cables;

- Installation of the communication system and SCADA;
- Upgrading, widening and strengthening of access road;
- Construction and installation of water supply and drainage system, power supply system and
fences; and
- Completion of internal electrical connections.
2.5.2.1 Wind Turbine Construction
2.5.2.1.1 Turbine Foundation

The turbine foundation will be the round shaped shallow mat type foundation. The foundation will include
the basement, the mat and the central pillar, which being poured concrete B35 (M450); gravel 1x2, and
bearing steels type CIII. The thickness of the concrete layer that protects steel against water resistant
should be 8.0 cm.
The area of each turbine foundation is estimated at about 1,500 m2. During the construction phase,
construction drawing is necessary, and piles installation is not allowed to apply on the strongly
weathered granite layer.
Formwork will be installed, braced and reinforced prior to concrete being poured into the foundation.
Formwork can be made of wooden planks. Formwork must be erected and tightened before concreting
begins.
Figure 2.16 Round Shaped Turbine Foundation7

 Concreting approach:
- Concrete is mixed at the batching plant with an electronic weighing system to ensure the exact
quantity and quality of batches;
- Concrete trucks are specialized types to ensure that concrete is not stratified, dehydrated or
wasted in transportation;
- Concrete is put into the foundation by concrete pumps truck;
7
Photo was refered from page: Wind Turbine Foundation: 5 Foundation Types Explained (steelwindtower.com) – Accessed on
11 March 2021.

- Get concrete samples (directly from concrete trucks) to measure the slump of concrete and
use this concrete sample as test samples before concreting (pouring concrete into pumps to
pump up construction site );
- Pumping concrete into the foundation by a pump.
- Compact concrete by electric batons ensures that the concrete slurry mixture becomes solid,
concrete does not exist pores, the outside surface is not porous and the concrete adheres to
the reinforcement.
 Maintenance work:
- Use jute sacks soaked in water to cover the surface of the foundation to avoid quick
evaporation of water causing cracks;
- Concrete is moistened by watering during the curing and shock-proof period to ensure a curing
process;
- The maintenance of concrete is conducted continuously for 04 days from the date of pouring.
2.5.2.1.2 Turbine Installation

After completing construction of the wind turbine foundation, the next steps will be to assemble the wind
turbine components. Lifting works will begin with the lowest tower subsections. Complete nacelles, with
gearboxes and generators already installed, will be lifted onto the tower tops. The rotor blades will be
fixed to the hub before being lifted and connected to the nacelle. It is noted that the installation of some
components cannot occur when the wind speed is greater than 10 m/s due to safety constraints of the
cranes.
An example photo for WTG installation is presented in Figure 2.17.
Figure 2.17 Wind Turbine Installation8
8
Referred from page: How to construct wind turbines? (industrycrane.com) ( Accessed on 11 March 2021)

2.5.2.2 Transmission Line

The construction of the transmission lines includes but is not limited to the following activities:
 Building the transmission pylons foundation, including:
- Soil excavation;
- Installing the cast-in place reinforced concrete foundation by concreted stone 2x4, compression
strength of B15 (M200) and precast reinforced concrete foundation concreted stone 1x2,
compression strength of B15 (M200)
 Assembling the pylons: Using centrifugal concrete column of 12m; 14m and 16m of height.
 Installation of insulation and accessories;
 Straining of rope to measure deflection;
 String power lines; and
 Grounding installation work.
The underground cables installation process includes:
 Soil excavation and trenching;
 Laying the cables in the middle of the trench;
 Laying the protective tile just above the sand bed;
 Backfilling the excavated soil leaving 300 mm from the ground level; and
 Lay the Cable warning tape and again back-fill the remaining portion of the trench up to the ground
level.
2.5.2.3 Power Supply

According to Basic Design Report, power for the construction phase will be supplied from self-powered
transformer TD42 22/0.4kV- 250KVA, which taken from national grid. The power for batching plant will
also be taken from national grid. There are mobile two generators with capacity 500kVA each which will
be used for lighting provided for each turbine foundation construction. Demand fuel volume is estimated
around 3.6 m3 for whole construction phase. Fuel for generator will be purchased from the nearest gas
station in Khe Sanh Town (1.5 km to the site) and be transported by dedicated trucks.
As observed from Site visit in November 2020, there are two small temporary fuel storage areas
approximately 40 m2 with capcity of 2x 25 m 3 and 1x50 m3. The temporay fuel storage area is served
for road construction activities which is managed by 384 subcontractor (384 Company).
2.5.2.4 Water Supply

According to the Basic Design Report, water demand for the construction activities will be sourced from
piped water supply system in Khe Sanh. The Project owner signed a water supply contract with the Khe
Sanh water supply company to supply 30m3 of water per day. The water demand for the construction
activities is estimated around 25 m3 per day at the peak time (in which 16m3 per day for road watering
on sunny days and around 9 m 3 per day for the batching day9). As such, the water supply contract is
able to ensure the water supply for the construction activities.
For workers’ domestic water usage, groundwater from two (2) existing wells at the worker camps. The
total water requirements for construction phase is estimated about 4 m3 per day for totally 50 workers
who are accommodated at worker camp in peak period of the construction.
9
Batching day means the turbine foundation construction day which is required to be completed in one day to ensure the
concrete quality. The Project will construct the turbine foundation one by one.

2.5.2.5 Transportation of Equipment and Material

Transportation of equipment
Major equipment will be imported at Hon La port (Quang Binh province) being 230 km away to the
Project site. These equipment will be transported through sea and then unloaded at Hon La port.
Equipment will be transported to the Project site via the route as follows:
 Hon La port  National Road 1A at Km600 – Km754 milestone  National Road 9 at Km0 – Km63
milestone  gathering area of Lien Lap Wind Farm construction.
Figure 2.18 Equipment Transportation Route

Transportation of material
In term of sourcing the construction material, it is understood that some materials (levelling sand, brick,
stone, iron, steel materials) can be purchased directly from local suppliers in Khe Sanh Town, Quang
Tri province and its vicinity. The average length of the material transport route is 12km. Refer to Figure
2.19 illustrating the construction material transportation route.
Figure 2.19 Material Transportation Route
2.5.3 Operation and Maintenance

Activities that will be carried out during the operation and maintenance phase includes:
 Commissioning tests of the wind farm which usually involves inspection of wind measurement (wind
speed, wind direction, air density, etc.), standard electrical tests and civil engineering quality within
the first month of wind turbines’ operation phase. Careful testing at this stage is extremely crucial
to assess whether a good quality wind farm can be delivered and maintained. Generally,
commissioning of an individual turbine can take more than two days with experienced staff. Some
parameters need to be tested during commissioning tests including wind speed, wind direction, air
density, turbine rounds per minutes, adjusted angle, turbine control system, SCADA, etc.
 Routine inspection of all Wind Turbine Generators (WTGs) as per supplier’s specifications
 Scheduled maintenance activities at each WTG location as per the supplier’s Guidance on
Operation and Maintenance;
 Operations and maintenance of ancillary facilities such as yards, stores, Central Monitoring System
(CMS) building facilities;
 Inspection and maintenance of transmission lines; and
 Inspection and maintenance of intra-site pathways.

2.5.4 Decommissioning Phase

Decommissioning plan is not available at the moment, therefore Lien Lap Wind Power JSC shall
conduct the impact assessment for the decommissioning activities prior to any decommissioning
activities.
2.6 Unplanned Events

There is the potential for unplanned events to occur during the construction, operation or
decommissioning phase of the project. Examples of unplanned events include:
 Environmental incidents such as leakage and spill incident
 Vehicle, vessel accidents;
 Natural disaster such as land slide, erosion;
 Fire or explosion;
 Medical emergencies such as injury, illness, or fatalities.
2.7 Project Management

Some key agencies involve in project management, including:
 Project owner: Lien Lap JSC
 Equipment Supplier: Vestas
 Construction unit: PCC1
 Operation and Maintenance: Lien Lap JSC.
 See Section 13.2 for the description on the organisation chart with role and responsibilities for
environmental and social management during the construction and operation phases.
2.8 Employment
The Project plans to recruit at least 20% of labour force from the locals (with priority to Van Kieu first
before other locals in the district and commune) with subject to the availability and interest of candidates
from the community. The Project owner confirmed that they will prioritise local labor force for the Project
with the commitment to be at least 20%. For the construction phase, unskilled labour (e.g. construction
workers) can be supplied from the local labour force. For the operation phase, at least 20% of
employment for unskilled works, such as cleaner, security guards will be allocated. For other positions,
a target of at least 20% of local recruitment will be adopted but subject to the availability of candidates
with required skills and experience.
2.8.1 Construction
The main labour source for the construction phase included (i) local labour supplied by domestic
construction company; (ii) Foreign consultant and project manager.
The Project’s manpower resources for each month during the construction phase is presented in Figure
2.20. During construction, the EPC contractor and subcontractors will arrange for workers to live in
nearby rented accommodation and in two worker’s camps. See Section 2.4.2.4 for the worker
accommodation site arrangement.
Project implementation manpower consisted of management personnel from the Project Owner,
consultants and personnel from EPC contractor, including sub-contractors and material, equipment
vendors.
During construction expected personnel employment will be as follows:

 Number of working day/year: 365 days

 Construction period: 15 months
 Working hours: 8 hours, 7 days per week
 Number of shift/day: 1 shift/day
Figure 2.20 Manpower Resource for Construction Phase
2.8.2 Operation
The Project Owner will employ the operator to operate and maintain the wind farm under agreed O& M
contract during the Project Life cycle (50 years). The total employees during the Operation and
Maintenance Phase would be up to 20 persons (1 manager, 16 operational officers, 3 support staffs,
i.e. cleaner, driver, and guard), 3 shifts per day for the total of 365 days.

INITIAL ENVIRONMENTAL AND SOCIAL EXAMINATION REPORT ADMINISTRATIVE FRAMEWORK
3. ADMINISTRATIVE FRAMEWORK
This chapter provides legal and regulatory framework, covering national requirements as well as
applicable international treaties, guidelines and standards. The intent of this Chapter is to discuss the
regulatory context, which is directly related to environmental compliance, which must be adhered to by
all parties involved in the Project throughout the planning, construction and operation.
3.1 Overview
There are two levels of regulatory provisions applicable to the Project. The first is the Vietnamese
assessment and approvals process, which must be followed to achieve environmental approval by
regulators. Secondly, as the Project proponent seeks to meet international standards, the ADB
Safeguard Policy Statement (2009). The primary means of the ADB expectations into the construction
and operations phases of the Project is through the preparation of this IESE.
The Project has obtained regulatory approval for its regulatory Environmental Protection Plan (EPP)
which is a simplified type of Environmental Impact Assessment (EIA), however, in applying international
standards to the Project there are additional international standards and expectations which the Project
will be required to fulfil throughout the construction and operation phases. While some synergies exist
between Vietnamese regulatory EIA and IESE, there are also some key differences which have
necessitated the preparation of this IESE.
The regulatory EIA and IESE processes and their relevance to the Project are described in detail below.
3.2 Regulatory Frameworks in Vietnam

The various regulatory frameworks that will be adopted for this Project are detailed below.
3.2.1 Law on Environmental Protection

The Law on Environmental Protection (LEP) No. 55/2014/QH13, dated 23 June, 2014 is the main piece
of environmental legislation currently in force in Vietnam. The law assigns national responsibility to
environmental strategy, the drafting of regulations and standards and all monitoring to the Ministry of
Natural Resources and Environment (MoNRE), and the Vietnam Environment Protection Agency
(VEPA). Responsibility for implementation of environmental policy at the local level is assigned to the
provincial assemblies through their Department of Natural Resources and Environment (DoNRE).
3.2.2 Environmental Regulations/ Standards

 Decree No. 38/2015/ND-CP dated 24 April, 2015 on waste and scrap management;
 Decree No. 40/2019/ND-CP dated 13 May, 2019 amending a number of articles of decrees that
guiding the implementation of the Law on Environmental Protection;
 Decree No. 80/2014/ND-CP dated 06 August, 2014 on the drainage and treatment of wastewater;
 Circular No. 31/2016/TT-BTNMT dated on 14 October 2016 on environmental protection for
industrial clusters, concentrations of businesses, service providers, trade villages, and production,
commercial and service establishment;
 Circular No. 36/2015/TT-BTNMT dated 30 June, 2015 on hazardous waste management;
 Circular No. 04/2015/TT-BXD Providing guidance on a number of articles of the government
Decree No. 80/2014/ND-CP dated 06 August, 2014 on drainage and wastewater treatment;
 Circular No. 08/2017/TT-BXD dated 16 May, 2017 on construction waste management;
 QCVN 03-MT:2015/BTNMT - National Technical Regulation on the allowable limits of heavy metals
in the soils;
 QCVN 05:2013/BTNMT - National Technical Regulation on Ambient Air Quality;

 QCVN 06:2009/BTNMT - National Technical Regulation on Hazardous Substances in Ambient Air;

 QCVN 07:2009/BTNMT - National Technical Regulation on Hazardous Waste Thresholds;
 QCVN 08-MT:2015/BTNMT - National Technical Regulation on Surface Water Quality;
 QCVN 09-MT:2015/BTNMT - National Technical Regulation on Ground water Quality;
 QCVN 14:2008/BTNMT - National Technical Regulation on Domestic Wastewater;
 QCVN 40:2011/BTNMT - National Technical Regulation on Industrial Wastewater;
 QCVN 26:2010/BTNMT - National Technical Regulation on Noise.
3.2.3 Environmental Impact Assessment

The LEP states that all enterprises, as prescribed by the Government within the law, shall conduct a
Strategic Environmental Assessment (SEA), an Environmental Impact Assessment (EIA) or
Environmental Protection Plan (EPP) and obtain approval prior to the development and operation of a
facility. The key EIA regulations are given below:
 LEP 2015;
 Decree No. 40/2019/ND-CP dated 13 May, 2019 amending a number of articles of decrees that
guiding the implementation of the Law on Environmental Protection;
 Decree No. 18/2015/ND-CP dated 14 February, 2015 on environmental protection planning, SEA,
EIA and EPP;
 Decree No. 19/2015/ND-CP dated 14 February, 2015 detailing the implementation of a number of
articles of the law on environmental protection;
 Circular No. 27/2015/TT-BTNMT dated 29 May, 2015 on SEA, EIA and EPP; and
 Circular No. 26/2015/TT-BTNMT dated 28 May, 2015 on regulating detailed environmental
protection projects, simple environmental protection projects.
Vietnam’s regulatory EIA process is shown in Figure 3.1 below.

Source: EIA, 2019
Figure 3.1 Structure of EIA Process in Vietnam
3.2.3.1 Public Consultation

Under Decree No. 40/2019/ND-CP, public consultation is required to be conducted during EIA
preparation. The Decree requires that project owners consult with People’s Committees (PCs) of the
communes, wards and towns located within proximity of the project area, as well as local organisations
and the communities directly affected by the project. Information gleaned through research and
community feedback mechanisms must be meaningfully considered in order to minimise the negative
effects of the project on the natural environment, biodiversity and community health.
 The PC of the commune where the project is expected to be located and organisations under direct
impact of the project shall be consulted as per the following procedures:
 The project owner shall send EIA reports to the PC and organisations directly affected by the
project, together with a written request for opinions;

 Within 15 working days from the date on which the EIA reports are received, the PC and
organisations under the direct impact of the project shall send their response if they have concerns
regarding the project.
Consultation with the community under the direct impact of the project shall be carried out in the form
of community meeting co-chaired by the project owner and the relevant PC, together with the
participation of representatives from the Vietnamese Fatherland Front of communes, socio-political
organisations, socio-professional organisations, neighbourhoods and villages, and convened by the
relevant PC. All opinions of delegates attending the meeting must be adequately and honestly recorded
in the meeting minutes.
3.2.3.2 Information Disclosure

As required by the Decree No. 40/2019/ND-CP, the EIA shall be implemented with guidance of the
Ministry of Natural Resources and Environment. The project proponent shall develop a plan to manage
any environment affected by the project, based on the EIA report’s recommendations, and have the
plan available at the project site.
3.2.4 Law on Forestry 2017 and Law on Biodiversity 2008

The Law on Forestry 2017 regulates the rights and obligations of the forest owners’ 10 organisations who
are allocated forest in Vietnam for management. They must manage, protect, develop and use the
forest sustainably in compliance with forest management regulations, provisions stated herein and other
regulations required by relevant law. Those regulations stipulate that forest owners must:
 Comply with regulations on inspection of forest development;
 Return the forest that the State appropriates according to provisions stated herein;
 Conserve forest biodiversity, forest plants and animals;
 Ensure forest fire safety, prevent and eliminate forest pests;
 Facilitate management, inspection or actions against violations carried out by a competent state
authority; and
 Fulfil financial obligations and other obligations.
3.2.5 National Regulations on Land Acquisition, Compensation, Support and

Resettlement
The Land Law No. 45/2013/QH13, dated November 29, 2013 is the existing supreme legal regulation
prescribing land use rights and land management in Vietnam, including those of land acquisition,
compensation, support and resettlement.
3.2.5.1 National Level Regulations

 Law on Land No. 45/2013/QH13 (Land Law 2013);
 Decree No. 01/2017/ND-CP dated January 6, 2017 on Amendments to Decrees on the
Implementation of the Land Law 2013;
 Decree No. 47/2014/ND-CP dated May 15, 2014 of the Government on regulating CSR Policies
when land is acquired by the government;
 Decree No. 43/2014/ND-CP dated May 15, 2014 of the Government detailing a number of articles
of the Land Law 2013;
10
“forest owner” may be an organisation, household, individual or community that is allocated or leased out a forest by the
State; allocated or leased out land for afforestation, forest regeneration or development; receives transfer of the forest, receives
the forest as a gift or inherits the forest according to regulations of law

 Decree No. 44/2014/ND-CP dated May 15, 2014 of the Government prescribing Land Prices;
 Circular No. 30/2014/TT-BTNMT dated June 02, 2014 of MoNRE regulating documents on land
allocation, land lease, land use change and land acquisition;
 Circular No. 37/2014/TT-BTNMT dated June 30, 2014 of MoNRE detailing CSR policies when land
is acquired by the government;
 Decree No. 45/2014/ND-CP dated May 15, 2014 of the Government, regulating the collection of
land-use fee;
 Decree No. 35/2015/ND-CP dated 13 April 2015 by the Government on use and management of
paddy land;
 Circular No. 36/2014/TT-BTNMT dated June 30, 2014, detailing the land valuation method; building
and adjustment of specific land prices and consultation for land-price valuation;
 Decree No. 104/2014/ND-CP dated November 14, 2014 of the Government on land price bracket;
 Circular No. 23/2014/TT-BTNMT dated May 19 2014 providing for certificate of land use right,
house ownership and other properties associated with the land;
 Circular No. 02/2015/TT-BTNMT dated 27 January 2015 by the Ministry of Natural Resources and
Environment on detailing a number of articles of Decree No. 43/2014/ND-CP and Decree No.
44/2014/ND-CP;
 Circular No. 33/2017/TT-BTNMT dated September 29, 2017 of MoNRE stipulating details on
compensation, support, resettlement and land acquisition procedures, handing-over land, and
leasing land of Decree No. 01/2017/ND-CP;
 Decree No. 61/2015/ND-CP dated July 07, 2015 regulating policies on assistance in job search
and the National Employment Funds;
 Decision No. 63/2015/QD-TTg dated December 10, 2015 on Assistance in Vocational Training and
Job Search for People Whose Land is Withdrawn by The State; and
 Decision No. 46/2015/QD-TTg dated September 28, 2015 on Support for Basic Training Courses
and Short-Term Training Courses.
3.2.5.2 Provincial Level Regulations

 Decision No. 31/2017/QD-UBND dated 20 November 2017 of Quang Tri Province People’s
Committee on regulating Compensation, Support and Resettlement Policies upon land
expropriation by the State in Quang Tri Province;
 Decision No. 16/2018/QD-UBND dated 28 August 2018 of Quang Tri Province People’s Committee
on amendment and supplement of a number of articles related to Compensation, Support and
Resettlement Policies upon land expropriation by the State in Quang Tri Province regulated in
Decision No. 31/2017/QD-UBND dated 20 November 2017 of Quang Tri Province People’s
Committee;
 Decision No. 49/2019/QD-UBND dated 20 December 2019 of Quang Tri Province People’s
Committee on issuing the list of land price in Quang Tri Province which is applied for 5 years (2020-
2024);
 Decision No. 01/2013/QD-UBND dated 20 January 2013 of Quang Tri Province People’s
Committee on issuance of unit price for assets are house, architecture and plants applied in Quang
Tri Province;
 Decision No 1061/QĐ – UBND dated 10 May 2019 of Quang Tri Province People’s Committee on
Land Use Plan in 2019 of Huong Hoa District;

 Decision No. 2746/QĐ-UBND, dated 11 October, 2017 of Huong Hoa District People’s Committee
on adjusting Land Use Plan towards 2020 of Huong Hoa District;
 Document No. 63/HĐND-KTNS dated 15 Mar 2019 by Quang Tri Provincial People’s Council,
approving for land acquisition and changing land use purpose for the development of wind and
solar farms in the province
 Decision 3759/QĐ-UBND dated 31 Dec 2019 by Quang Tri Provincial People’s Committee on
authorizing the approval of specific land price for some cases;
 Notification Letter No. 16/TB-UBND dated 11 Feb 2020 by Huong Hoa District People’s Committee
on notifying the land acquisition for Lien Lap Wind Farm Project;
 Decision No. 462/QD-UBND dated 24 Mar 2020 by Huong Hoa District People’s Committee on
approval of General Compensation, Support and Resettlement Plan for Lien Lap Wind Farm
Project; and Decision 798/QD-UBND dated 28 Apr 2020 by Huong Hoa District People’s
Committee on amendments to some articles in the Decision No. 462/QD-UBND;
 Decision No. 645/QD-UBND dated 1 Apr 2020 by Huong Hoa District People’s Committee on
approving specific land price for the land acquisition for Lien Lap Wind Farm Project;
A typical land compensation, support and resettlement process that complies with Vietnamese
regulation includes the following main steps.
Figure 3.2 Land Compensation, Support and Resettlement Process Required in Vietnam
Note: Inventory of Loss (IOL) and Detailed Measurement Survey (DMS) are conducted under the presence of members of the
CSR Council and affected household’s representative(s). IoL and DMS results will be disclosed to the Project affected persons
(PAPs) for review and signature. All DMS results will be collected and sent back to the PC at provincial or district level who is
tasked with the CSR process for signing and stamping.
3.2.6 National Regulations on Electricity

The Law on Electricity No. 28/2004/QH11 was approved by the National Assembly of the Socialist
Republic of Vietnam at its 6th session on December 03, 2004, Decree No. 14/2014/ND-CP dated
February 26, 2014 stipulates in detail the implementation of The Law on Electricity, especially regarding
electricity safety and Decree No. 51/2020/ND-CP dated April 21, 2020 amending a number of articles

of the Decree No. 14/2014/ND-CP dated February 26, 2014 stipulates in detail the implementation of
The Law on Electricity, especially regarding electricity safety. Its key regulations are as follows:
According to Article 12 of Decree No. 14/2014/ND-CP, for any 110kV lines outside cities and towns the
distance from the highest point of the trees vertically to the height of the lowest conducting line at the
state of maximum deflection must not be less than 3m. In addition, for any 35kV lines outside cities and
towns, distance from the highest point of the trees vertically to the height of the lowest bare conducting
line and covered conducting line at the state of maximum deflection must not be less than 2m and 0.7m,
respectively. In any case where the trees are outside the safety corridor of overhead conducting lines
and outside cities, towns etc., the distance from any part of tree when the tree falls to any part of 110kV
line and 35kV line must not be less than 1m and 0.7m, respectively. Rice, crops and plants must be
planted at least 0.5m from the pole foundation and sleeper; and
According to Article 13 of Decree No. 14/2014/ND-CP and Article 1 of Decree No. 51/2020/ND-CP,
houses and constructional works are permitted to exist within the safety corridor of overhead conducting
lines with voltage up to 110kV if they meet the following conditions: 1) Roof and walls must be made of
non-combustible materials; 2) There must be no obstruction of the entry or exit of the house or works
during testing, maintenance and replacement of parts of the transmission line; 3) The distance from any
part of the house or works to the nearest conducting line when the line is at the state of maximum
deflection must not be less than 4m (for conducting line of 110kV) and 3m (for conducting line up to
35kV); 4) The electric field intensity must be less than 5kV/m at any point outside the house or works,
and one meter from the ground and less than or equal to 1kV/m at any point inside the house and one
meter from the ground.
Figure 3.3 Safety Corridor Required for Transmission Lines

Other regulations on electricity in Vietnam include:
 Circular No. 31/2014/TT-BCT dated October 02, 2014 regulating details on electrical safety;
 QCVN 25:2016/BYT – National Technical Regulation on Industrial Frequency Electromagnetic
Fields – Permissible Exposure Level of Industrial Frequency Electromagnetic Fields in the
Workplace; and
 QCVN 21:2016/BYT – National Technical Regulation on High Frequency Electromagnetic -
Permissible Exposure Level of High Frequency Electromagnetic Intensity in the Workplace.

3.2.7 National Regulations on Grievances

Community grievances mechanisms in Vietnam are regulated by the Law on Grievance 2011.
Generally, it stipulates that if a person has a grievance they must first submit it to local authorities at the
lowest level (commune PC). If their grievance cannot be solved at that level, they are entitled to a
second and third submission to authorities of higher administrative levels (i.e., district PC/Court and
then provincial PC/ Court).
3.2.8 National regulations on Occupational Health and Safety (OHS)

Law No. 84/2015/QH13 on occupational safety and hygiene dated June 25, 2015, deals with
occupational hygiene and safety assurance, policies and benefits for victims of occupational accidents
and occupational diseases (hereinafter referred to as victims), the rights and obligations of
organisations or individuals relating to occupational hygiene and safety, and the roles of regulatory
agencies in occupational hygiene and safety.
In addition to this law, a number of Decrees, Circulars, Decisions and Standards have been issued
relating to, health, sanitation and safety. Particularly, Decree No. 39/2016/ND-CP, dated May 15, 2016
and Decree No. 44/2016/ND-CP, dated May 15, 2016 provide guidance on implementation of the Law
on Occupational Safety and Hygiene. The employer has the responsibility to fully provide employees
with the technical equipment required for labour safety and labour sanitation and to improve their
working conditions wherever possible. The employee must follow regulations on labour safety, labour
sanitation and the labour regulations of the business. Under the above Decrees, Circular No.
07/2016/TT-BLDTBXH dated May 15, 2016, Circular No. 08/2016/TT-BLDTBXH dated May 15, 2016,
Circular No. 19/2016/TT-BYT dated June 20, 2016, etc. were issued to provide instruction on
implementation of those Decrees. All organisations and individuals associated with labour and
production must observe national legislations on labour safety, labour sanitation and environmental
protection.
3.2.9 National Regulations on Chemicals

Law No. 06/2007/QH12 sets national requirements on the classification, labelling, packaging,
transportation, storage and use of chemicals. For any projects where chemicals listed in Appendix IV
of Decree No. 113/2017/ND-CP are used onsite, the project owners are required to i) develop and
implement chemical-related incident prevention and response plans and establish safety distances; or
ii) develop and implement chemical-related incident prevention and response measures. A list of
chemicals subject to conditional production or trading, chemicals restricted from production or trading,
as well as banned chemicals were provided in Decree No. 113/2017/ND-CP dated October 09, 2017.
Circular No. 32/2017/TT-BCT dated December 28, 2017 under this Decree guides project owners on
labelling, packaging, storage and usage of chemicals..
The Stockholm Convention was signed on 22/5/2001 and entered into force on 17/5/2004 with the aim
of protecting human health and the environment from the risks of Persistent Organic Pollutants (POPs).
Vietnam ratified the Stockholm Convention on 22/7/2002 and was the 14th party to the Convention. To
implement the Stockholm Convention, Vietnam issued the National Implementation Plan for the
Stockholm Convention, under Decision No. 184/2006/QD–TTg dated August 10, 2006 pertaining to
safety management, minimisation and eventual elimination of POPs in Vietnam. The Decision meets
both the requirements of the Stockholm Convention and Vietnam’s goal of sustainable development.
3.2.10 National Regulations on Fire Prevention and Fire Fighting

Law No. 27/2001/QH10 on Fire Prevention and Fighting mandates that every entity has responsibilities
in fire prevention and firefighting and that the heads of agencies, organisations and households must
support the organisation and regularly inspection of fire prevention and firefighting activities, within the
ambit of their respective responsibilities. Fire prevention and firefighting plans for all developments listed
in Annex IV of Decree No. 79/2014/ND-CP dated July 31, 2014 of the Government must be prepared,

appraised, and approved by the relevant authorities before project construction. To have a fire
prevention and firefighting plan approved, a dossier must be prepared and submitted to the Fire Police
for appraisal and approval, as specified in Article 15 of Decree No. 79/2014/ND-CP.
3.2.11 Regulations on Labour Rights

The main legislation in Vietnam relating to labour rights, health and safety is the Labour Code No.
10/2012/QH13 by the Vietnamese National Assembly, effective from 1 January 2021. It stipulates that
everyone has the right to work without discrimination based on sex, nationality, social background,
beliefs or religion. Maltreatment of an employee and forced labour in any form are strictly forbidden.
The government protects workers through its relevant legislation on employment, apprenticeship,
labour contracts, collective labour accord, salary, work and break time, labour discipline, material
liability, specific provisions for female workers, minors and other types of workers (elderly workers,
disabled workers, highly-skilled professionals and technically-skilled workers, employees working for
foreign organisations and individuals in Vietnam, foreigners working in Vietnam and Vietnamese
employees working abroad, as well as other types of labour), social insurance, trade unions, and
settlement of labour disputes.
3.2.12 National Regulations on Ethnic Minorities

 Resolution No. 22/NQ-TW dated 27 November 1989 the Politburo of the Central Committee
Communist Party of Vietnam on guidelines and master policies on socio-economic development of
mountainous regions;
 Resolution No. 24-NQ/TW by IX Central Committee of the Communist Party of Vietnam dated 12
March 2003 on ethnic minority issues;
 Conclusion No. 65-KL/TW dated 30 October 2019 by the Politburo of the Central Committee
Communist Party of Vietnam on continued implementation of Resolution No. 24-NQ/TW;
 Resolution No. 88/2019/QH14 dated 18 November 2019 by the National Assembly on approving
the Master Plan of socio-economic development of ethnic minority and mountainous regions in
2021-2030; and
 The Government is formulating the National Target Program of Socio-Economic Development of
Ethnic Minority and Mountainous Regions in 2021-2030.
3.3 International Regulatory Framework

The Applicable International Standards that will be adopted for this Project are as follows.
3.3.1 Equator Principles III (2013)

The Equator Principles (EPs) refer to the environmental and social risk management framework
voluntarily adopted by 83 member financial institutions (Equator Principle Financial Institutions (EPFIs)).
They are primarily intended to provide a minimum standard for due diligence to support responsible risk
decision-making. The EPs were developed by private-sector banks and launched in June 2003. They
were first revised in July 2006 and new revisions, known as EP III, took effect on June 4, 2013.
The EPs establish voluntary principles for addressing environmental and social risks and issues in
global project finance transactions, including adherence to IFC PS. The EPs are designed to serve as
a benchmark for the financial industry to manage social and environmental risks in project financing.
They apply to all new project financings with total project capital costs of USD10 million or more, across
all industry sectors. The Principles (EPs 1 to 10) are:
 Principle 1: Review and Categorisation;
 Principle 2: Environmental and Social Assessment;
 Principle 3: Applicable Environmental and Social Standards;

 Principle 4: Environmental and Social Management System and Equator Principles Action Plan;
 Principle 5: Stakeholder Engagement;
 Principle 6: Grievance Mechanism;
 Principle 7: Independent Review;
 Principle 8: Covenants;
 Principle 9: Independent Monitoring and Reporting; and
 Principle 10: Reporting and Transparency.
The EP III can be found on the Equator Principles website 11.
Principle 1: Review and Categorisation: the Project is categorised to ensure that the required level
of environmental and social due diligence is commensurate with the nature, scale and stage of the
Project, and with the level of environmental and social risks and impacts. The categories are:
 Category A – Projects with potential significant adverse environmental and social risks and/or
impacts that are diverse, irreversible or unprecedented;
 Category B – Projects with potential limited adverse environmental and social risks and/or impacts
that are few in number, generally site-specific, largely reversible and readily addressed through
mitigation measures; and
 Category C – Projects with minimal or no adverse environmental and social risks and/or impacts.
Principle 2: Environmental and Social Assessment: all Category A and Category B Projects are
required to conduct an assessment process to address the relevant environmental and social risks and
impacts of the proposed Project.
Principle 3: Applicable Environmental and Social Standards: requires that the Project comply with
relevant host country laws, regulations and permits that pertain to environmental and social issues. The
principle also brings into consideration compliance with the IFC PS on Environmental and Social
Sustainability and the World Bank EHS Guidelines.
Principles 4 to 7 and Principles 9 and 10 apply to all Category A and, as appropriate, Category B
Projects. Principle 8 applies to all Category A and Category B Projects.
3.3.2 ADB Safeguard Policy Statement

In July 2009, ADB’s Board of Directors approved the Safeguard Policy statement (SPS) governing the
environmental and social safeguards of ADB’s operation. The SPS builds upon ADB’s previous
safeguard policies on the Environment, Involuntary Resettlement, and Indigenous Peoples, and brings
them into one consolidated policy framework with enhanced consistency and coherence, and more
comprehensively address environmental and social impacts and risks. The SPS also provide platform
for participation by affected people and other stakeholders in the Project design and implementation.
ADB adopts a set of specific safeguard requirements that are required to address environmental and
social impacts and risks:
 Safeguard Requirements 1: Environment;
 Safeguard Requirement 2: Involuntary Resettlement;
 Safeguard Requirement 3: Indigenous Peoples; and
 Safeguard Requirements 4: Special Requirements for Different Finance Modalities.
11
https://equator-principles.com/wp-content/uploads/2017/03/equator_principles_III.pdf (Accessed on April 9, 2020)

3.3.2.1 General Requirements

The Policy Delivery Section (Chapter VB, paras.53-64) lists general requirements that the ADB is
obliged to follow in regard to: project screening and classification, information disclosure, consultation
and participation, due diligence, monitoring and reporting, local grievance redness mechanism and the
Bank’s Accountability Mechanism.
 Project screening and classification: The Policy stipulates that the ADB will undertake project
screening as early as possible to i) determine the significance of adverse impacts; (ii) identify the
level of assessment and institutional resources required; (iii) determine disclosure requirements
(para.50)
 Information disclosure: In line with the ADB’s Access to Information Policy, environment Category
A projects’ draft environmental impact assessment must be posted on the ADB’s website 120 days
before project approval. For draft environmental assessment and review frameworks, draft
resettlement frameworks and/or plans and draft Indigenous Peoples planning frameworks and/or
plans, the Policy only stipulates that these documents must be provided by the borrower/client and
posted on ADB’s website before project appraisal, as follows: (i) final or updated environmental
impact assessments and/or initial environmental examinations, resettlement plans, and Indigenous
Peoples plans upon receipt (by the ADB) and ii) environment, involuntary resettlement and
Indigenous Peoples monitoring reports submitted by borrowers/clients during project
implementation upon receipt (by the ADB).
 Consultation and participation: The Policy states that the ADB “is committed to working with
borrowers/clients to put processes of meaningful consultation and participation in place”.
Meaningful participation is defined as: (i) beginning early in the project preparation stage and being
carried out on an ongoing basis throughout the project cycle; (ii) providing timely disclosure of
relevant and adequate information that is accessible to affected people; (iii) being free of
intimidation and coercion; (iv) being gender inclusive and responsive; and v) enabling the
incorporation of all relevant views of affected people and other stakeholders in decision making
(para.54)
 Due diligence and review of safeguard assessments and plans: Due diligence refers to the ADB’s
process of assessing safeguard issues through field visits and desk reviews as well as through
examining relevant safeguard documents (such as environmental impact assessments,
resettlement plans, Indigenous Peoples plans). Through its due diligence processes, the ADB
confirms that all potential environmental and social risks are identified. If they cannot be avoided,
it ensures that appropriate mitigation measures are identified (SPS, para.56)
 Monitoring and reporting: The monitoring obligations are merely required to be “commensurate
with the project’s risks and impacts”. For highly complex and sensitive projects, the ADB requires
the borrower/client to engage an independent advisory panel” (SPS, para.57)
 Local grievance redress mechanisms: The Policy requires the borrowers/ client to set up and
maintain a grievance redress mechanism at project level (SPS, para.59). This mechanism does
not replace the ADB’s accountability mechanism, but is intended to solve grievances at the local
level. Affected people can also take complaints to the ADB’s Accountability Mechanism. The
Accountability Mechanism Policy merely requires complainants to demonstrate that they have
sought to address their complaint with management.
3.3.2.2 Environmental Requirements

The main Environmental Safeguard requirements are the followings:
 Categorization and Information disclosure: The Policy uses a categorization system to reflect the
significance of a project’s potential environmental impacts. “A project’s category is determined by
the category of its most environmentally sensitive component, including direct, indirect, cumulative

and induced impacts in the project’s area of influence” (SPS, para.50). The following categories
exist:
- Category A: A proposed project is classified as category A if it is likely to have significant
adverse environmental impacts that are irreversible, diverse, or unprecedented. These
impacts may affect an area larger than the sites or facilities subject to physical works. An
environmental impact assessment (EIA), including an environmental management plan
(EMP), is required.
- Category B: A proposed project is classified as category B if its potential adverse
environmental impacts are less adverse than those of category A projects. These impacts are
site-specific, few if any of them are irreversible, and in most cases mitigation measures can be
designed more readily than for category A projects. An initial environmental examination (IEE),
including an EMP, is required.
- Category C: A proposed project is classified as category C if it is likely to have minimal or no
adverse environmental impacts. An EIA or IEE is not required, although environmental
implications need to be reviewed.
- Category FI: A proposed project is classified as category FI if it involves the investment of ADB
funds to, or through, a financial intermediary.
 Assessment process: Environmental impacts must be determined in consultation with affected
people and concerned non-government organizations (NGOs). For category A projects, the
borrower/client is required to undertake an assessment of options that looks at alternatives to the
project’s location, design, technology and components. The options assessment will also examine
the “no project” alternative. The borrower/client must present the rationale for selecting the
particular project details, including a cost-benefit analysis that takes into account environmental
costs and benefits of the various alternatives considered (SPS, Appendix 1, para. 4).
 Type of impacts: The types of impacts related to the environment include physical, biological and
socioeconomic impacts. These can relate to occupational health and safety; community health and
safety; vulnerable groups; gender issues; and impacts on livelihoods and physical cultural
resources (SPS, Appendix 1, para. 5).
 Project site/scope: The project site covered by the environmental safeguard provisions in the Policy
is defined as: “the primary project site(s) and related facilities that the borrower/client (including its
contractors) develops or controls, such as power transmission corridors, pipelines, canals, tunnels,
access roads, borrow pits and disposal areas, and construction camps”. This definition also
includes: associated facilities that are not funded as part of the project, but “whose viability and
existence depends exclusively on the project”; “areas and communities potentially affected by
cumulative impacts from further planned development of the project”; and predictable impacts
caused by the project “that may occur later or at a different location” (SPS, Appendix 1, para. 6).
 Transboundary impacts: The environmental assessment process must identify potential
transboundary effects, such as air pollution and increased use or contamination of international
waterways. It must also identify global impacts, such as the impact of greenhouse gases and
impacts on endangered species and habitats (SPS, Appendix 1, para. 7).
 Environmental planning and management: If environmental impacts are identified, the borrower/
client is required to prepare an environmental management plan describing how potential impacts
and risks will be addressed (SPS, Appendix 1, para. 12).
 Consultation and participation, grievance mechanism: The consultation process and grievance
mechanism process follows the same provisions as laid out in the general requirements (see
above) (SPS, Appendix 1, paras. 19 and 20).
 Reporting and monitoring: The Policy states that "the extent of monitoring activities will be
commensurate with the project’s risks and impacts" (SPS, Appendix 1, para. 21). For Category A

projects, the borrower/client is required to retain qualified external experts or qualified NGOs to
verify its monitoring information. The minimum requirements are semi-annual reports during
construction for Category B projects, and quarterly monitoring reports during construction for
Category A reports. For projects with likely ongoing impacts during operation, annual monitoring is
required. Monitoring reports must be posted in a location accessible to the public (SPS, Appendix
1, paras. 21 & 22).
 Unanticipated environmental impacts: If unanticipated impacts occur during project
implementation, the borrower/client is required to update the environmental assessment and
environmental management plan or prepare a new assessment and plan (SPS, Appendix 1, para.
23).
 Biodiversity conservation and sustainable natural resource management: This section (SPS,
Appendix 1, paras. 24 – 49) contains requirements regarding the following issues: modified
habitats; natural habitats; critical habitats; legally protected areas; invasive alien species;
management and use of renewable resources; pollution prevention and abatement (resource
conservation, energy efficiency, waste, hazardous materials, pesticide use and management,
greenhouse gas emissions); health and safety (occupational health and safety and community
health and safety); and physical cultural resources (SPS, Appendix 1, para. 24).
3.3.2.3 Involuntary Resettlement Requirements

The involuntary resettlement impacts of an ADB – supported project are considered significant if 200 or
more persons will be physically displaced from home or lose 10% or more of their productive or income-
generating assets
For those involving involuntary resettlement, a resettlement plan is prepared that is commensurate with
the extent and degree of the impacts: the scope of physical and economic displacement and the
vulnerability of the affected persons.
The ADB Safeguard Policy identified Project categories in term of Involuntary Resettlement is
summarized below:
 Category A: A proposed project is classified as Category A if it is likely to have significant
involuntary resettlement impacts. A resettlement plan, which includes assessment of social
impacts, is required.
 Category B: A proposed project is classified as Category B if it includes involuntary resettlement
impacts that are not deemed significant. A resettlement plan, which includes assessment of social
impacts, is required.
 Categories C: A proposed project is classified as Category C if it has no involuntary resettlement
impacts. No further action is required.
 Categories FI: A proposed project is classified as Catergory FI if it involves the investment of ADB
3.3.2.4 Indigenous Peoples Requirements

The impacts of an ADB-supported project on Indigenous peoples is determined by assessing the
magnitude of impact in terms of
 Customary rights of use and access to land and natural resources;
 Socioeconomic status;
 Cultural and communal integrity;
 Health, education, livelihood and social security status; and
 The recognition of indigenous knowledge; and

 The level of vulnerability of the affected Indigenous Peoples community

The ADB Safeguard Policy identified Project categories in term of Involuntary Resettlement is
summarized below:
 Category A: A proposed project is classified as Category A if it is likely to have significant impacts
on Indigenous Peoples. An Indigenous Peoples plan (IPP), including assessment of social impacts,
is required.
 Category B: A proposed project is classified as Category B if it is likely to have limited impacts on
Indigenous Peoples. An IPP, including assessment of social impacts, is required.
 Category C: A proposed project is classified as Category C if it is not expected to have impacts on
Indigenous Peoples. No further action is required.
 Category FI: A proposed project is classified as Catergory FI if it involves the investment of ADB
3.3.3 ADB Social Protection Strategy (2001)

The Social Protection Strategy was approved by ADB on September 13, 2001. It is defined as the set
of policies and programs designed to reduce poverty and vulnerability by promoting efficient labour
markets, diminishing people's exposure to risks, and enhancing their capacity to protect themselves
against hazards and interruption/ loss of income.
The SPS spells out the scope of social protection and commitment of the ADB to develop priority
interventions in five major elements:
 labour market policies and programs designed to generate employment, improve working
conditions and promote the efficient operations;
 social insurance programs to cushion the risks associated with unemployment, ill health, disability,
work-related injury and old age;
 social assistance and welfare service programs for the vulnerable groups with inadequate means
of support, including single mothers, the homeless, or physically or mentally challenged people;
 micro and area-based schemes to address vulnerability at the community level, including micro
insurance, agricultural insurance, social funds and programs to manage natural disasters; and
 child protection to ensure the healthy and productive development of children
3.3.4 ADB Gender and Development Policy (1998)

ADB Gender and Development Policy, which was approved in 1998, is the guiding framework for gender
and development activities. The Policy adopts gender mainstreaming as the key strategy for promoting
gender equality and women’s empowerment across the full range of ADB operations—from country
partnership strategies to the design and implementation of gender-inclusive projects and programs. The
key elements of ADB’s policy will include gender sensitivity, gender analysis, gender planning,
mainstreaming, and agenda setting. To operationalize the policy, ADB’s focus of activities will be to:
 provide assistance to its developing member countries (DMCs) in the areas of policy support,
capacity building, GAD awareness, and formulation and implementation of policies and programs
directed at improving the status of women;
 facilitate gender analysis of proposed projects, including program and sector loans, and ensure
that gender issues are considered at all the appropriate stages of the project cycle, including
identification, preparation, appraisal, implementation, and evaluation;
 promote increased GAD awareness within ADB through training workshops and seminars,
development of suitable approaches, and staff guidelines to implement the policy on GAD;

 assist the DMCs in implementing commitments made at the Beijing World Conference on Women;
and
 explore opportunities to directly address some of the new and emerging issues for women in the
region
3.3.5 Access to Information Policy (2018)

The policy aims to promote stakeholder trust in ADB and to increase the development impact of ADB
activities. It reflects ADB’s commitment to transparency, accountability, and participation by
stakeholders in ADB-supported development activities in Asia and the Pacific. It also recognizes the
right of people to seek, receive, and impart information about ADB’s operations. The policy applies to
documents and information that ADB produces, requires to be produced by its borrowers or clients, or
are produced and provided to ADB by other parties in the course of ADB operations.
3.3.6 ADB Accountability Mechanism Policy (2012)

ADB’s Accountability Mechanism provides a forum where people adversely affected by ADB – assisted
projects can voice and seek solutions to their problems and report alleged noncompliance with ADB’s
operational policies and procedures. It consists of two separate but complementary functions: the
problem solving function and the compliance review function. The objective of the Accountability
Mechanism Policy (2012) is to be accountable to people for ADB- assisted projects as a last resort
mechanism.
3.3.7 JICA’s Environmental and Social Guidelines

The latest Environmental and Social Guidelines of Japan International Cooperation Agency (JICA) were
issued on April 01, 2010 and came into effect from July 01, 2010. The guidelines were consolidated
from different guidelines for environmental and social considerations used by former Japan Bank for
International Cooperation (JBIC) and JICA. The objectives of the guidelines are to encourage Project
proponents to have appropriate consideration for environmental and social impacts and examination of
environmental and social considerations are conducted accordingly. The guidelines outline JICA’s
responsibilities and procedures, along with its requirements for project proponents in order to facilitate
the achievement of these objectives. In doing so, JICA endeavours to ensure transparency,
predictability, and accountability in its support for and examination of environmental and social
considerations.
In these guidelines, JICA has created clear requirements regarding environmental and social
considerations that the project proponents must meet. In particular, the project is required to incorporate
the output of environmental and social considerations studies into project planning and decision-making
processes. The following is seven principles that are considered very important by JICA:
 A wide range of environmental and social impacts must be addressed;
 Measures for environmental and social considerations must be implemented from an early stage
to a monitoring stage;
 Accountability and transparency must be ensured when implementing cooperation projects;
 Stakeholder opinions must be included into decision-making processes regarding environmental
and social considerations;
 JICA itself discloses information on environmental and social considerations in collaboration with
project proponents in order to ensure accountability and to promote the participation of various
stakeholders;
 JICA makes efforts to enhance the comprehensive capacity of organizations and operations in
order for project proponents to have appropriate and effective consideration for environmental and
social factors at all times; and

 JICA addresses request of acceleration for the prompt implementation of projects while undertaking
environmental and social considerations
3.3.8 IFC’s Performance Standards on Environmental and Social

Sustainability (2012)
In April 2006, the IFC, a member of the World Bank Group, released a set of Performance Standards
(PS) based upon the original World Bank Group Safeguard Policies, which recognised further the
specific issues associated with private sector projects. The IFC PS have been broadened to include
issues such as greenhouse gases, human rights, community health, and safety and security. A revised
set of PS came into force on January 1, 2012. The complete list of IFC PS is provided in Figure 3.4 and
more details can be found on the IFC website12.
Source: IFC, 2019
Figure 3.4 IFC Performance Standards
3.3.9 World Bank General EHS Guidelines (2007)

Supplementing the IFC PS are the General EHS Guidelines that were released in April 2007. The EHS
Guidelines are technical reference documents with general and industry-specific examples of Good
International Industry Practice (GIIP). They are categorised by environment, occupational and
community health and safety, and construction and decommissioning. The General EHS Guidelines
are designed to be used together with the relevant Industry Sector EHS Guidelines, which provide
guidance to users on EHS issues within specific industry sectors.
3.3.9.1 World Bank EHS Guidelines for Electric Power Transmission and Distribution
(2007)
The EHS Guidelines for Electric Power Transmission and Distribution include information relevant to
power transmission between a generation facility and a substation located within an electricity grid, in
addition to power distribution from a substation to consumers located in residential, commercial, and
industrial areas.
12
http://www.ifc.org/wps/wcm/connect/Topics_Ext_Content/IFC_External_Corporate_Site/IFC+Sustainability/Sustainability+Fra
mework/Sustainability+Framework+-+2012/Performance+Standards+and+Guidance+Notes+2012/ .
The Guidance Note of PS6 is the basis of the Critical Habitat Assessment for this project.

The EHS Guidelines for Electric Power Transmission and Distribution are organised in the following
sections:
 Section 1.0 — Industry-Specific Impacts and Management
 Section 2.0 — Performance Indicators and Monitoring
 Section 3.0 — References and Additional Sources
 Annex A — General Description of Industry Activities
3.3.9.2 World Bank EHS Guidelines for Wind Energy

The EHS Guidelines for Wind Energy include information relevant to environmental, health, and safety
aspects of onshore and offshore wind energy facilities. It should be applied to wind energy facilities from
the earliest feasibility assessments, as well as from the time of the environmental impact assessment,
and continue to be applied throughout the construction and operational phases.
3.3.10 IFC and EBRD’s Guidance Note on Workers’ Accommodation:

Processes and Standards
This guidance was issued by IFC and EBRD to provide specific and practical guidance on appropriate
policies and standards relating to workers’ accommodation, which is required in IFC Performance
Standard 2 and EBRD Performance Requirement 2.
The Guidance Note on Workers’ Accommodation is organised in the following sections:
 Section I: Planning and assessing requirements for workers’ accommodation. This section provides
guidance on assessing the need for workers’ accommodation, assessing potential impacts of
workers’ accommodation on communities, and types of workers’ accommodation; and
 Section II: Standards for and management of workers’ accommodation. This section provides
instruction on standards applicable to a project, including national/ local standards as well as
international standards and good practices on general living facilities; sanitary facilities; canteen,
cooking and laundry facilities; and nutrition and food safety.
3.4 International Conventions
3.4.1 The Kyoto Protocol on Climate Change (UNFCC)

Vietnam became a signatory to the UNFCC in 1998 with full accession in 2002. This obligates Vietnam
to assure that future development in the country meets the conditions of the Convention. Relevant to
this project are the requirements associated with the potential generation of greenhouse gas. Further
conditions of relevance include:
 Enhancement of energy efficiency in relevant sectors;
 Protection and enhancement of sinks and reservoirs of greenhouse gases;
 Promotion of sustainable forest management practices, afforestation and reforestation;
 Promotion of sustainable forms of agriculture;
 Implementation of measures to limit and/ or reduce emissions of greenhouse gases; and
 Limitation and/ or reduction in methane emissions.
3.4.2 The United Nations Convention on Biodiversity 1992

This Convention seeks to conserve biodiversity and promote its sustainable use. It requires the
identification and monitoring of the biodiversity in an area and adopting the necessary conservation
measure. Vietnam became party to this Convention in 1994.

3.4.3 The Basel Convention 1989

This was developed under the auspices of the United Nations Environmental Programme (UNEP) in
response to the growing worldwide awareness of the problem of international traffic in hazardous waste.
The Basel Convention 1989 is the first and foremost global environmental treaty that strictly regulates
the trans-boundary movement of hazardous wastes. It obligates parties to ensure environmentally
sound management, especially during the disposal process.
The objectives of the Convention are to:
 Ensure that waste is disposed of as near as possible to the place or source of its generation;
 Reduce trans-boundary waste and where it cannot be avoided, to be disposed of in an
environmentally sound and efficient manner; and
 Provide assistance to developing countries in the management of hazardous waste and the
generation.
 The Convention places a ban on the export of hazardous waste from Organization for Economic
Cooperation and Development (OECD) countries to non-OECD countries.
3.4.4 International Union for Conservation of Natural and Natural Resources,

Red List of Threatened Species
The IUCN Red List, in 1964, was founded in order to provide a comprehensive inventory of the global
conservation status of biological species, and to set of precise criteria to evaluate the extinction risk of
thousands of species and subspecies. These criteria are applicable to all species and all regions of the
world. Following the guidelines of the IUCN Red List, Vietnam’s Red List was produced in 1992, updated
in 2007, and has been an effective guideline for conservation of extinction species in Vietnam.
3.4.5 The United Nations Declaration on the Rights of Indigenous Peoples

The United Nations Declaration on the Rights of Indigenous Peoples was adopted on September 13,
2007. Currently, the Declaration is the most comprehensive international instrument on the rights of
Indigenous Peoples. It establishes a universal framework of minimum standards for the survival, dignity
and well-being of the Indigenous Peoples of the world and it elaborates on existing human rights
standards and fundamental freedoms as they apply to the specific situation of Indigenous Peoples.
3.4.6 International Covenant on Economic, Cultural and Social Rights

The International Covenant on Economic, Social and Cultural Rights is a multilateral treaty adopted by
the United Nations General Assembly on December 16, 1966 and came in force from 3 January 1976.
It commits its parties to work toward the granting of economic, social, and cultural rights, including
labour rights and the right to health, the right to education, and the right to an adequate standard of
living.
3.4.7 The International Labour Organization’s Labor Standards

The international labour standards developed and adopted by The International Labour Organization
(ILO) sets out basic principles and rights at work. They are conventions which are legally binding
international treaties that may be ratified by member states. The eight fundamental Conventions of ILO
are:
 Freedom of Association and Protection of the Right to Organise Convention, 1948;
 Right to Organise and Collective Bargaining Convention, 1949;
 Forced Labour Convention, 1930;
 Abolition of Forced Labour Convention, 1957;

 Minimum Age Convention, 1973;

 Worst Forms of Child Labour Convention, 1999;
 Equal Remuneration Convention, 1951; and
 Discrimination Convention, 1958.
Vietnam has been a member of ILO since 1994. Afterwards, labour management regulations in Vietnam
have also been developed, updated and issued to ensure the alignment with requirements of the above
convention. Therefore, local regulations on labour management, together with above conventions are
requirements applicable to a project developed in Vietnam

INITIAL ENVIRONMENTAL AND SOCIAL EXAMINATION REPORT IMPACT ASSESSMENT METHODOLOGY
4. IMPACT ASSESSMENT METHODOLOGY
4.1 Introduction
This section presents the methodology used to conduct this IESE, which follows the approach illustrated
in Figure 4.1. This IESE has been undertaken following a systematic process that: evaluates the
potential impacts the Project could have on aspects of the physical, biological, social/socio-economic
and cultural environment; identifies preliminary measures that the Project will take to avoid,
minimise/reduce, mitigate, offset or compensate for potential adverse impacts; and identifies measures
to enhance potential positive impacts where possible.
Source: ERM, 2019
Figure 4.1 Process for Producing an IESE

This section also details the methodology used for the collection and analysis of primary and secondary
data used in this report. Primary and secondary information from the Project Owner, government
sources, non-governmental organisations (NGOs) and other Project-related stakeholders have been
collected to support the preparation of this report.
4.2 Screening
At the initial stage of this IESE, preliminary information was provided to aid in the determination of what
legal and other requirements should be applied to the Project. This step was completed utilising a high-
level description of the Project and its associated facilities.

4.3 Scoping
Scoping has been undertaken to delineate the potential Area of Influence for the Project (and thus the
appropriate Study Area), and to identify potential interactions between the Project and
resources/receptors in the Area of Influence (i.e., identifying the potential impacts that could result from
these interactions). It also helps in developing and selecting alternatives to proposed action and in
identifying the issues to be considered in this IESE.
The content of this IESE report has been prepared according to the output from the scoping process,
which is further detailed in Chapter 5.
4.4 Project Description

In order to set out the scope of the Project features and activities, with particular reference to the aspects
which have the potential to impact the environment, a Project Description has been prepared. Details
of the Project facilities’ design characteristics, as well as planned and possible unplanned Project
activities, are provided in Chapter 2 of this IESE Report.
4.5 Baseline Conditions

To provide the context within which the impacts of the Project can be assessed, a description of
physical, biological, social/socio-economic and cultural conditions that would be expected to prevail in
the absence of the Project is presented. The Baseline includes information on all resources/receptors
that were identified during scoping as having the potential to be significantly affected by the Project.
The baseline characterisation is reported in Chapter 7 and Chapter 8 of this IESE Report.
4.6 Stakeholder Engagement

An effective IESE Process requires engagement with relevant stakeholders throughout the key stages.
This assists in understanding stakeholder views on the Project and in identifying issues that should be
taken into account in the prediction and evaluation of impacts.
Details of the Stakeholder Engagement activities undertaken for this Project to date are presented in
Chapter 6 of this IESE Report.
4.7 Impact Assessment (IA)

Impact identification and assessment starts with scoping and continues throughout the remainder of the
IESE Process. The main IESE steps are summarised below and comprise of:
Potential Impact Identification: to determine what could potentially happen to resources/receptors as
a consequence of the Project and its associated activities;
Impact Evaluation: to evaluate the significance of the predicted impacts by considering their magnitude
and likelihood of occurrence, and the sensitivity, value and/or importance of the affected
resource/receptor;
Management and Mitigation Enhancement Measures: to identify appropriate and justified measures
to mitigate potential negative impacts and enhance potential positive impacts; and
Residual Impact Evaluation: to evaluate the significance of potential impacts assuming effective
implementation of mitigation and enhancement measures.

Source: ERM, 2019
Figure 4.2 IA Process
4.7.1 Prediction of Impacts

Prediction of impacts is essentially an objective exercise to determine what is likely to happen to the
environment as a consequence of the Project and its associated activities. From the potentially
significant interactions identified during the Scoping phase, the impacts to the various
resources/receptors are elaborated and evaluated. The diverse range of potential impacts considered
in the IESE Process typically results in a wide range of prediction methods being used, including
quantitative, semi-quantitative and qualitative techniques.
4.7.2 Evaluation of Impacts

Once the identification of potential impacts is complete, each potential impact is described in terms of
its various relevant characteristics (e.g. type, scale, duration, frequency, extent). The terminology and
designations used to describe impact characteristics are shown in Table 4.1.
Table 4.1 Impact Characteristic Terminology
Characteristic Definition Designations
Type A descriptor indicating the relationship of the Direct

potential impact to the Project (in terms of cause Indirect
and effect). Induced
Extent The “reach” of the potential impact (e.g., confined to Local
a small area around the Project footprint, projected Regional
for several kilometres, etc.). International
Duration The time period over which a resource / receptor is Temporary
potentially affected. Short-term
Long-term

Characteristic Definition Designations

Scale The size of the potential impact (e.g. the size of the [no fixed designations; intended to be a
area with the potential to be damaged or impacted, numerical value or a qualitative
the fraction of a resource that could potentially be description of “intensity”]
lost or affected, etc.)
Frequency A measure of the constancy or periodicity of the [no fixed designations; intended to be a
potential impact. numerical value or a qualitative
description]
The definitions for the type designations are shown in Table 4.2. Definitions for the other designations
are resource/receptor-specific, and are discussed in the resource/receptor-specific IA chapters
presented later in this IESE.
Table 4.2 Impact Type Definitions
Type Definition
Direct Potential impacts that result from a direct interaction between the Project and a resource/receptor
(e.g. between occupation of a plot of land and the habitats which are affected).
Indirect Potential impacts that follow on from the direct interactions between the Project and its environment
as a result of subsequent interactions within the environment (e.g. viability of a species population
resulting from loss of part of a habitat as a result of the Project occupying a plot of land).
Induced Potential impacts that result from other activities (which are not part of the Project) that happen as
a consequence of the Project (e.g. influx of camp followers resulting from the importation of a large
Project workforce).
The above characteristics and definitions apply to planned and unplanned events. An additional
characteristic that pertains only to unplanned events is likelihood. The likelihood of an unplanned event
occurring is designated using a qualitative scale, as described in Table 4.3.
Table 4.3 Definitions for Likelihood Designations
Likelihood Definition
Unlikely The event is unlikely but may occur at some time during normal operating conditions.
Possible The event is likely to occur at some time during normal operating conditions.
Likely The event will occur during normal operating conditions (i.e., it is essentially inevitable).
Once impact characteristics are defined, the next step in the IA phase is to assign each potential impact
a ‘magnitude’. Magnitude is typically a function of some combination (depending on the
resource/receptor in question) of the following impact characteristics:
 Extent;
 Duration;
 Scale;
 Frequency; and
 Likelihood (for unplanned event).
Magnitude essentially describes the intensity of the change that is predicted to occur in the
resource/receptor as a result of the potential impact. The magnitude designations themselves are
universally consistent, but the definitions for these designations vary depending on the
resource/receptor. The universal magnitude designations are:

 Positive;
 Negligible;
 Small;
 Medium; and
 Large.
In the case of a potential positive impact, no magnitude designation (aside from ‘positive’) is assigned.
It is considered sufficient for the purpose of the IESE to indicate that the Project is expected to result in
a potential positive impact, without characterising the exact degree of positive change likely to occur.
In the case of potential impacts resulting from unplanned events, the same resource/receptor-specific
approach to concluding a magnitude designation is utilised. However, the ‘likelihood’ factor is
considered, together with the other impact characteristics, when assigning a magnitude designation.
In addition to characterising the magnitude of impact, the other principal impact evaluation step is
definition of the sensitivity/vulnerability/importance of the impacted resource/receptor. There are a
range of factors to be taken into account when defining the sensitivity/vulnerability/importance of the
resource/receptor, which may be physical, biological, cultural or human. Other factors may also be
considered, such as legal protection, government policy, stakeholder views and economic value. As in
the case of magnitude, the sensitivity/vulnerability/importance designations themselves are universally
consistent, but the definitions for these designations vary on a resource/receptor basis. The
sensitivity/vulnerability/importance designations used herein for all resources/receptors are:
 Low;
 Medium; and
 High.
Once magnitude of impact and sensitivity/vulnerability/importance of resource/receptor have been
characterised, the significance can be assigned to each impact. Impact significance is designated using
the matrix shown in Table 4.4.
Table 4.4 Impact Significance
Sensitivity/Vulnerability/Importance of Resource/Receptor
Low Medium High

Magnitude of Impact
Negligible Negligible Negligible Negligible
Small Negligible Minor Moderate
Medium Minor Moderate Major
Large Moderate Major Major
The matrix applies universally to all resources/receptors, and all impacts to these resources/receptors,
as the resource/receptor-specific considerations are factored into the assignment of magnitude and
sensitivity/vulnerability/importance designations that enter into the matrix. The context for what the
various impact significance ratings signify is presented in the box below.
It is important to note that impact prediction and evaluation take into account any embedded controls
(i.e., physical or procedural controls that are already planned as part of the Project design, regardless
of the results of the IESE Process). This helps avoid a situation where an impact is assigned a
magnitude based on a hypothetical version of the Project that considers none of the embedded controls.


4.7.4 Residual Impact Evaluation

Once mitigation and enhancement measures are declared, the next step in the IESE Process is to
assign residual impact significance. This is essentially a repeat of the IA steps discussed above,
considering the implementation of the proposed mitigation and enhancement measures.
4.7.5 Management, Monitoring and Audit

The final stage of the IESE Process is defining the basic management and monitoring measures that
are needed to identify whether: a) impacts or their associated Project components remain in
conformance with applicable standards; and b) mitigation measures are effectively addressing impacts
and compensatory measures and offsets are reducing effects to the extent predicted.
A Register of Commitments, which is a summary of all actions the Project Proponent has committed to
executing, with respect to environmental/social/health performance for the Project, is also included as
part of this Report. The Register of Commitments includes mitigation measures, compensatory
measures and offsets, and management and monitoring activities.
4.8 Cumulative Impact

According to IFC 2013, “Cumulative impacts (CI) are those that result from the successive, incremental,
and/or combined effects of an action, project, or activity when added to other existing, planned, and/or
reasonably anticipated future ones”. According to the IFC (IFC 2013), the assessment and management
of cumulative impacts is necessary when the Project and other developments under consideration could
contribute to generating cumulative impacts on valued environmental and social component.
In order to gain an understanding of the projects overall contribution to impacts, a cumulative impact
assessment (CIA) was undertaken. Whilst total cumulative impacts due to multiple projects within a
given area should be identified within government- led spatial planning efforts, the Project owner needs
to determine the degree to which it is contributing to these overall cumulative impacts. In this regards,
the objectives of the CIA are twofold:
 Determine if the cumulative impacts caused by the Project and other existing or predictable future
projects would threaten the sustainability of valuable environmental component (VEC) in the area;
and
 Develop mitigation measures to prevent unacceptable conditions of VECs. The measures could
include additional mitigation measures for Project and also additional mitigation measures for other
existing or predictable future projects in the area.
The IESE and CIA are prepared based on similar logical framework, analytical process and tools. Unlike
the IESE that centres on the Project as a source of impacts, the CIA focuses on VECs under influence
from different projects (Figure 4.3). In a CIA, the overall resulting condition of the VEC and its related
viability are assessed.
This CIA closely follows the six (6) steps of the IFC Guidance (IFC 2013), as shown in Figure 4.4.
IFC Guidance takes into consideration the limitations that a private developer may face carrying out a
CIA as part of an IESE, or difficulties encountered in compiling such information. The limitations
applicable to this CIA include:
 Incomplete information about other projects and activities (e.g. the information is not available in
the public domain);
 Uncertainty with respect to the implementation of future projects; and
 Difficulty in establishing thresholds or limits of acceptable change for VECs, and therefore the
significance of cumulative impacts.

IESE: Project-Centred Perspective CIA: VEC-Centred Perspective
Figure 4.3 IESE and CIA Analysis (IFC 2013)

Figure 4.4 Six-Step Approach for CIA (IFC 2013)

4.9 Risk assessment for Unplanned Events

To evaluate potential impacts from unplanned events, a risk-based approach is used to define: 1) the
most likely unplanned events leading to environmental, social and/or community health impacts; and 2)
those unplanned events with the most significant potential environmental, social and/or community
health impacts overall. Impact significance for unplanned events is therefore determined by evaluating
the combination of likelihood and consequence.
4.9.1 Assess the Scale of Consequence

Indicative levels of consequence for potential impacts from unplanned events can be defined for the
physical, biological, and social environment as provided below.
Table 4.5 Indicative Levels of Consequence for Potential Impacts from Unplanned Events
Incidental Minor Moderate Major Severe
Physical Impacts such as Impacts such as Impacts such as Impacts such as Exceedance of
Environment localised or short widespread, widespread, long- significant, widespread environmental
term effects or short-term term effects on and persistent standards and
environmental impacts to environmental changes in fine/
media, meeting all environmental media, meeting all environmental media prosecution
environmental media, meeting environmental OR
standards all standards
Exceedance of
environmental
environmental
standards
standards
Biological Impacts such as Impacts such as Impacts such as Impacts such as Impacts such
Environment localised or short localised, long localised but significant, widespread as persistent
term effects on term irreversible habitat and persistent reduction in
habitat or species degradation of loss or changes in habitat or ecosystem
sensitive habitat widespread, long- species function on a
or widespread, term effects on landscape scale
short-term habitat or species or significant
impacts to disruption of a
habitat or sensitive
species species.
Social Slight, temporary, Temporary (<1 Adverse specific Adverse long-term, Adverse long-
Environment adverse impact on year), adverse impacts on multiple impacts at a term, varied
a few individuals impacts on multiple individuals community level, but and diverse
community that can be restoration possible. impacts at a
which are within restored in <1 year OR community level
international or higher –
OR One or more severe
health standards restoration
injuries to a member
One or more unlikely. OR
of the public including
injuries, not
permanently disabling Fatalities of
severe.
injuries. public.
4.9.2 Assess the Likelihood

For the purposes of assessment, the likelihood of an unplanned event occurring can be classified as
follows:
1 - Remote, not known in the industry;

2 - Very unlikely, known of in the industry;

3 - Unlikely, may occur once or more in life of the Project;
4 - Likely, may occur once or twice per year;
5 - Expected, may occur more than twice per year.
4.9.3 Assess the Significance

The consequences and likelihood of potential unplanned events are combined to determine the overall
impact significance using the risk matrix shown in Table 4.6.
For potential impacts that are determined to have an impact significance of Moderate or Major, risk
reduction measures are identified; these can include measures that reduce the likelihood of the event
from occurring (i.e. preventive barriers), those that reduce the consequences on sensitive
receptors/resources if the event were to occur (i.e. mitigation or recovery measures), and those that
affect the likelihood and consequence.
Table 4.6 Risk Matrix for Potential Unplanned Events
Likelihood of Occurrence
1 2 3 4 5
Incidental Negligible Negligible Negligible Negligible Negligible
Minor Negligible Minor Minor Minor Moderate

Consequence
Moderate Minor Minor Moderate Moderate Major
Major Moderate Moderate Major Major Major
Severe Major Major Major Major Major

INITIAL ENVIRONMENTAL AND SOCIAL EXAMINATION REPORT IESE SCREENING AND SCOPING
5. IESE SCREENING AND SCOPING
5.1 Screening Result

At the initial stage of the IESE process, preliminary information was provided to support in the
determination of the legal and other requirements apply to the Project. This step was conducted utilizing
a high level description of the Project. The screening process involved the following:
 Reviewing of applicable regulatory framework for the Project;
 Reviewing of available Project related activities and their impacts on various components of
environment;
 Collection and compilation of available secondary baseline data from different sources; and
 Categorization of Project as per ADB Safeguard Policy.
 For the screening step, ERM undertook discussion with the Project team and review the available
documents provided by Client. The following Project categorization by ADB Safeguard Policy was
presented in this section below.
Environment
ADB uses a classification system to reflect the significance of a project’s potential environmental
impacts. A project’s category is determined by the category of its most environmentally sensitive
component, including direct, indirect, cumulative, and induced impacts in the project’s area of influence.
Each proposed project is scrutinized as to its type, location, scale, and sensitivity and the magnitude of
its potential environmental impacts. Projects are assigned to one of the following four categories:
Category A. A proposed project is likely to have significant adverse environmental impacts that are
irreversible, diverse, or unprecedented. These impacts may affect an area larger than the sites or
facilities subject to physical works. An environmental impact assessment (EIA), including an
environmental management plan (EMP), is required.
Category B. The proposed project’s potential adverse environmental impacts are site-specific, few if
any of them are irreversible, and in most cases mitigation measures can be designed more readily than
for category A projects. An initial environmental examination (IEE), including an EMP, is required.
Category C. A proposed project is likely to have minimal or no adverse environmental impacts. An EIA
or IEE is not required, although environmental implications need to be reviewed.
Category FI. A proposed project involves the investment of ADB funds to or through a financial
intermediary. The financial intermediary must apply and maintain an environmental and social
management system, unless all of the financial intermediary's business activities have minimal or no
environmental impacts or risks.
Project category justification
From the impact assessment chapter below, Environmental and social impacts of the Project during the
construction phase will increase noise level, changes in air quality, impacts on water quality, impacts
on soil erosion, terrestrial ecology, community health and safety, occupational health and safety, etc.
during the construction phase and operational impacts on water quality that relates mainly on residual
impacts from construction, impacts from shadow flicker, traffic impacts, birds/ bats impacts. Most of
these impacts are limited to the wind farm components and their immediate vicinity and can be
minimized through application of mitigation measures as proposed in the ESMP. As such the
environmental impact of the Project is categorized as B.
Involuntary Resettlement
The involuntary resettlement impacts of an ADB-supported project are considered significant if 200 or
more persons will be physically displaced from home or lose 10% or more of their productive or income-
generating assets. Projects are classified into the following four categories:

Category A. A proposed project is likely to have significant involuntary resettlement impacts. A

resettlement plan, which includes assessment of social impacts, is required.
Category B. A proposed project includes involuntary resettlement impacts that are not deemed
significant. A resettlement plan, which includes assessment of social impacts, is required.
Category C. A proposed project has no involuntary resettlement impacts. No further action is required.
management system, unless all of the financial intermediary's business activities are unlikely to
generate involuntary impacts.
Land acquisition for the Project was government-led and involuntary process with gaps against ADB
SPS Safeguard Requirement (SR) 2. A Land Acquisition Audit report was conducted for the Project to
identify and analyse the gaps. Total number of economically affected households by the Lien Lap
Project is 100 households; in which the number of households losing 10% production land or more is
22 households (120 people). It was also confirmed that was no physical displacement for this Project.
Therefore the Project is classified as Category B as per ADB SPS SR 2 for Involuntary Resettlement.
Indigenous Peoples
The impacts of an ADB-supported project on Indigenous Peoples is determined by assessing the
magnitude of impact in terms of customary rights of use and access to land and natural resources;
socioeconomic status; cultural and communal integrity; health, education, livelihood, and social security
status; and the recognition of indigenous knowledge; and the level of vulnerability of the affected
Indigenous Peoples community. Projects are classified into the following four categories:
Category A. A proposed project is likely to have significant impacts on Indigenous Peoples. An
Indigenous Peoples plan (IPP), including assessment of social impacts, is required.
Category B. A proposed project is likely to have limited impacts on Indigenous Peoples. An IPP,
including assessment of social impacts, is required.
Category C. A proposed project is not expected to have impacts on Indigenous Peoples. No further
action is required.
management system, unless all of the financial intermediary's business activities unlikely to have
impacts on Indigenous Peoples.
The social impact assessment conducted by ERM in June-August 2018 has, in consultation with ethnic
minority communities (EM) in project areas, identified the project-affected EM and identify potential
impacts of the proposed project on them.
ADB SPS SR 3 defines Indigenous Peoples as a distinct social and cultural group possessing the
following characteristics in varying degrees:
 Self-identification as members of a distinct indigenous cultural group and recognition of this identity
by others;
 Collective attachment to geographically distinct habitats or ancestral territories in the project area
and to the natural resources in these habitats and territories;
 Customary cultural, economic, social, or political institutions that are separate from those of the
mainstream society or culture; and
 A distinct language or dialect, often different from the official language or languages of the country
or region in which they reside.

Observations from the survey and background research to date specific to these characteristics are
described in the below table. The four characteristics are evaluated independently, and no characteristic
weighs more than the others.
Table 5.1 Characteristics of the Van Kieu Ethnic
No Characteristics The Van Kieu ethnic group Determined

(Yes/No)
1 Self- Van Kieu people have their own language, scripts and unique culture Yes
identification although they have integrated well to the larger Kinh community. Van
Kieu ethnic group has particular ethnic features and their identity is
normally recognized by other ethnic groups.
2 Collective Van Kieu ethnic group is one of three indigenous ethnic minorities Yes
attachment residing in the mountainous areas of Quang Tri and Thua Thien Hue
provinces. In the past, the Bru people had settled in the Central Laos.
Later, due to historical changes, they had to migrate to other places,
including some to the east to settle down in the West of Quang Tri
province where they set up their villages around the mountain called
Van Kieu, which popularly pronounced as Van Kieu. According to the
interview with local authorities at commune level, the Van Kieu people
have inhabited and attached to the mountainous area of Quang Tri
province for approximately 10 generations.
3 Customary Van Kieu people have distinct cultural practices such as community Yes
institutions organization, including the patriarch system, house style, ceremony
and festival, belief (Sacred Forest) and blowing rituals as described in
sections above.
4 Distinct Van Kieu people have their own language and scripts which is different Yes
language from the official language of Vietnam. Though they are also proficient
in official language, they often interact with each other in their
language.
Conclusion From the above analysis, it is concluded that the Van Kieu people is
considered as IPs as this ethnic minority group fulfils all four
characteristics mentioned in ADB SPS SR 3.

Van Kieu People has lived in this area for a long time and they are identified as a forest/natural resource
and land dependant community. Through the observation and interview with the local people and local
authority during the site survey, it is recognized that this People rely very much on the natural resources
for subsistence, medicine and livelihoods. Disaggregating the main livelihood structure by ethnicity
shows that that land-based livelihoods are predominant in the Van Kieu group with 93.6% of surveyed
people being farmers while Kinh people are engaged in diverse livelihoods. Agriculture production
contributes to more than 60% of their household income). Construction and operation activities of the
project (e.g., site clearance, transportation route, air pollution, noise and dust, and shadow flicker) were
also assessed to cause limited adverse impacts to the Van Kieu ethnic minorities. The project will also
entail positive impacts as it will open up socioeconomic opportunities and improve community
infrastructure. The Project is therefore classified as Category B. As such, as required by ADB, an IPP,
including assessment of social impacts and resource requirements for addressing impact, is required.

Gender Mainstreaming
The projects of ADB have four gender mainstreaming categories:
 Category I: gender equity as a theme (GEN);
 Category II: effective Gender mainstreaming (EGM);
 Category III: some gender elements (SGE); and
 Category IV: no gender elements (NGE).
 Project Gender Mainstreaming Category Justification
The Project is classified as Effective Gender Mainstreaming. The socio-economic baseline included:
 review of current gender policies, institutions and programs;
 gender analysis in labour division, household decision making and community participation;
 gender disaggregated data;
 men and women’s participation and voices; and
 vulnerable women.
Gender sensitive issues were highlighted in the impact assemments, and gender designed measures
were proposed in developing environmental and social management plans. To facilitate and ensure
women's participation and access to project benefits, specific gender design features were included in
project outputs and/or components, such as the LREMDP and CDP.
A Gender Action Plan was prepared, including the following: (i) targets for female workers during
construction and operation; (ii) increase in the proportion of female managers; (iii) development of an
anti-sexual harassment policy; (iv) training of staff on the new anti-sexual
harassment policy; and (v) inclusion of women from the local community, for the first time, in
the company’s vocational training on wind power operation and management.
5.2 Scoping
Scoping has been undertaken to identify the potential Area of Influence, potential interactions between
the Project activities and environmental and social resources or receptors in the Area of Influence. This
was based on (i) the project information currently available at the time of the IESE preparation process
and it should be noted that the project description in Chapter 2 remains the most up to date outline of
the project activities; (ii) the baseline information collected at the scoping time and (iii) the experience
gained in similar projects constructed in similar environmental and socioeconomic contexts.
The IESE covers the following project elements which have been described in details in Chapter 2,
including:
 Site preparation (site clearance, excavation and levelling), fencing, and civil works
 Wind turbine transportation and construction;
 Construction of Wind turbine foundation, transmission line pylons, internal road;
 Wind turbine installation;
 Wind turbine operation, maintenance and decommissioning; and
 Supporting facilities such as the concrete batching plant and auxiliary works.
5.2.1 Scoping Results

The scoping exercise is intended to ensure that the IA focuses on those issues that are most important
for design, decision-making and stakeholder interests. Table 5.2 presents the resources/receptors
considered during scoping.

Table 5.2 Resources/Receptors Considered during Scoping
Resources/Receptors Impacts
Environmental
Terrestrial vegetation Changes to vegetation population, health, species abundance and diversity and
impact on endangered and economic species, food chain effects
Avifauna species Impacts on endangered and economic species, food chain effects
Air Emissions of NOx, SOx, PM, CO.
Water resource (Surface Changes to physical, chemical or biological quality of rivers, lakes, and other
water and Groundwater) surface water bodies.
Introduction of exotic species; changes in habitat quality, abundance, diversity.
Effluent discharge.
Contamination of shallow or deep groundwater resources. Change in
groundwater resource
Change in water resources availability, impacts on demands of surface water
uses.
Soil Changes to physical and chemical properties and soil ecology
Noise Changes in noise level
Visual Amenity Potential impacts of the Project on specific views and on the general visual
amenity experienced by people.
Shadow Flicker Potential impacts on health of project-affected people (eyes, vision) and
vegetation growth
EMF Potential of electromagnetic interference (EMI) may occur from the Project
development.
Social / Socio-economic
Economy and employment Change in national/local economy, employment, standard of living, occupations
Economic and physical Temporary or permanent restriction for accessing or using land, changes in
displacement livelihood activities based on land-based resources; changes in ownership of
such resources.
Infrastructure and public Improvement or pressure on existing urban/rural infrastructure or services e.g.
services transportation, power, water, sanitation, waste handling facilities
Community Health and Safety
Environmental change Potential degradation in air quality (e.g. NOx, SOx, VOC, CO, PM),
contamination of surface water and potable ground water, increased vibration
and noise, increased night time light beyond acceptable limits, changes to the
visual environment.
Communicable and non- Change in incidence and /or prevalence of communicable and non-
communicable diseases communicable diseases or disease causing factors
Vector borne diseases Changes in the incidence and or prevalence of vector borne diseases, the
density of these vectors and their breeding grounds

Resources/Receptors Impacts
Sexually Transmitted Changes in the incidence and /or prevalence of STDs and the factors that
Diseases (STDs) contribute to this (e.g. external workforce, transport routes)
Health care/recreational Changes in availability of and access to health care and recreational facilities
facilities including green space
Occupational Health and There is the potential for occupational health and safety incidents throughout
Safety the life cycle of the project; the risk is particularly high during construction
phases (Using of heavy equipment and cranes, fall, exposure to dust, noise,
hazardous materials, electrical hazards from the use of tools and machinery,
working at height, overwater, EMF) and during the operation phase (blade
throw, electrical hazards, etc.)
Traffic Safety Changes in traffic volume contributes to increase risks of traveller safety,
especially the Project is located in a mountainous area.
Indigenous Peoples
Indigenous Peoples Changes in cultural resources, livelihood of Indigenous Peoples, impacts on

customary right of use and access to land and natural resources, socio-
economic status, cultural and community integrity; health, education, social
security status, indigenous knowledge.
5.2.2 Project Area of Influence

Under IFC PS1’s definition, the AoI encompasses, as appropriate:
“The area likely to be affected by: (i) the project and the client’s activities and facilities that are directly
owned, operated or managed (including by contractors) and that are a component of the project; (ii)
impacts from unplanned but predictable developments caused by the project that may occur later or at
a different location; or (iii) indirect project impacts on biodiversity or on ecosystem services upon which
Affected Communities’ livelihoods are dependent.
Associated facilities, which are facilities that are not funded as part of the project and that would not
have been constructed or expanded if the project did not exist and without which the project would not
be viable.
Cumulative impacts that result from the incremental impact, on areas or resources used or directly
impacted by the project, from other existing, planned or reasonably defined developments at the time
the risks and impacts identification process is conducted.”
Based on available information of the Project provided by the Client, and information obtained from the
site visit, the scoping opinion meeting with local authorities and good international industry practice on
potential E&S impacts of a wind power project, the Project’s AoI is defined as below:
 Project AoI of noise impact should be determined within 2,000m of any turbines;
 Project AoI of shadow flicker should be determined as 10 times of rotor diameters from each turbine
location;
 Project AoI of blade throw should be determined as 1.5 times of turbine height (tower and rotor
radius);
 Project AoI of community health and safety should be determined as 2,000m of any turbines; and
 Project AoI of biodiversity is considered as Ecological Appropriate Area for Analysis (EAAA) to be
assessed to define habitat values in the immediate project vicinity where species may regularly
dwell.

Area of Influence of the Project is presented from Figure 5.1 to Figure 5.4.
Figure 5.1 Areas of Influence of Noise and Shadow Flicker
Figure 5.2 Areas of Influence of Blade Throw

Figure 5.3 Areas of Influence of Community Health and Safety
Figure 5.4 Ecological Area of Influence

Nearby sensitive receptors have been identified at the initial site visit, including:
 Residential areas: The nearest residential structure is approximately 350 m from the WTG12 to the
south and southeast, which is located in Bu Village, Tan Lap Commune. Bu village is resided by
Van Kieu Ethnic Minority.
 Water bodies: There are some small lakes, streams within the Project area where local people
using for agricultural irrigation. The big one is located in the northeast part of the Project.
 Key biodiversity and protected areas:
- Project site is within 50km from Dakrong, Dong Phou Vieng, Laving –Laveun, Phong Dien,
Truong Son and Upper Xe Bangfai key biodiversity areas (IBAT, 2020); and
- The Project is also within 50km from Bac Huong Hoa, Dakrong, Dong Phou Vieng and Phong
Dien Protected Areas (IBAT, 2020).
Project’s potential sensitive receptors are presented in Figure 5.5 and Figure 5.6 below.
Figure 5.5 Social and Physical Environment Sensitive Receptors

Figure 5.6 Key Protected Areas
5.2.3 Identification of Potential Impact

Following the determination of Area of Influence, the Scoping Matrix is used as a tool to support a
methodological identification of potential interactions each Project activity may have on the range of
resources/receptors within the AoI. It consists, on one side of the matrix, a list of Project activities during
the construction and operation phases which may give rise to significant impacts. These are set against
a list of environmental and social resources/receptors within the AoI with potential to interact. Entries in
the matrix cells are coloured to indicate following potential impacts:
Scope in/out Description

Scoped Out
■ An interaction is not reasonably expected
Scoped Out or integrated with other
■ An interaction is reasonably possible but none of the
major interactions resulting impacts are likely to lead to significant effects
Further Consideration in Impact

■ The interaction is reasonably possible and at least one of
Assessment the resulting impacts is likely to lead to an effect that is
significant
Interaction likely to lead to Potential
■ An interaction with positive impact expected
Positive Impacts
All potential interactions, regardless of probability of occurrence, are considered at this stage. Those
cells that are coloured white are ‘scoped out’ of further consideration in the impact assessment (IA).
Those interactions that are grey are also ‘scoped out’ with supporting reasons to justify the decision.
Those interactions that are shaded black are retained for further consideration in the IA process and
these interactions are elaborated in Table 5.2 for further details.

Table 5.3 Scoping Matrix
PROJECT PHASES AND ACTIVITIES Environment Social
Community Health, Safety

Occupational Health and
Economy& Employment
Surface Water Quality
Cultural Resources of
Terrestrial Fauna and
Groundwater Quality
Infrastructure/ Public
Indigenous Peoples
Noise and Vibration
Ambient Air Quality
Visual Amenity
and Security
Soil Quality
Livelihood
Land Use
Avifauna
Services
Safety
Flora
Pre-Construction
Land Acquisition
Workforce Mobilization and Presence
Land Preparation (site clearance, excavation and levelling), fencing,

and civil works
Construction
Equipment and material transport and supply

Construction of turbine foundations, transmission line pylons,
internal road, upgrading of access road, auxiliary works and turbine
installation
Wastes, emissions and discharges generation, handling and disposal
Operation of associated facilities such as the concrete batching plant
Construction water usage
Workforce Presence

PROJECT PHASES AND ACTIVITIES Environment Social
Community Health, Safety

Occupational Health and
Economy& Employment
Surface Water Quality
Cultural Resources of
Terrestrial Fauna and
Groundwater Quality
Infrastructure/ Public
Indigenous Peoples
Noise and Vibration
Ambient Air Quality
Visual Amenity
and Security
Soil Quality
Livelihood
Land Use
Avifauna
Services
Safety
Flora
Commissioning and Operation
Workforce Presence
WTG Operation
WTG Inspection and Maintenance
Waste, emissions and discharge generation, handling and disposal
Unplanned Events
Leakage and spill incident

Fire and explosion
Vehicle collision
Blade throw
Transmission line snapping
Natural Hazards (Flood and Landslide)

INITIAL ENVIRONMENTAL AND SOCIAL EXAMINATION REPORT STAKEHOLDER ENGAGEMENT
6. STAKEHOLDER ENGAGEMENT
This section presents main stakeholder engagement activities of the Project during the development of
the nationally regulatory Enviromental Impact Assessment (EIA) and this IESE. Detailed of discussions
and responses during such engagements are described in the Stakeholder Engagement Plan of the
Project.
6.1 Stakeholder Engagement during EIA Process

The Project did not acquire land of protection forest and special-use forest. Therefore, the project is
only required to conduct the Environment Protection Plan (EPP) instead of the local EIA. Thus, there is
no requirement for conducting the public consultation under the development of the EPP.
6.2 Stakeholder Engagement during IESE Process
6.2.1 Stakeholder Engagement in May 2020
6.2.1.1 Meeting with Local Authorities

From 4 to 7 May 2020, the Project Owner and the Project’s consultant – ERM Vietnam Company Limited
(ERM), have conducted formal meetings with regulatory bodies from district and commune levels to:
 Follow-up the current socio-economic conditions and future socio-economic development plans of
the Project areas; and
 Obtain their opinions and concerns on the development of the Projects;
The following authorities were involved in the meetings with the Project Owners and ERM:
 People’s Committee (PC) of Huong Hoa District;
 PC of Tan Lien and Tap Lap Communes;
 Huong Hoa - Dakrong Protection Forest Management; and
 Huong Hoa District Land Fund Development Center (LFDC).
A summary of discussions, concerns, and recommendations generated in the course of Project Owner’s
engagement with local authorities during May 2020 engagement is provided in Table 6.1.
Corresponding minutes of meetings with detailed discussion as well as full lists of meeting participants
are attached in Appendix N.
Table 6.1 Summary of Stakeholder Engagement Activities with Authorities and Relevant
Organisations during IESE Process
Interview Organisations Topics Covered in the meetings interview

Groups
State ■ Huong Hoa - Dakrong ■ Update the organisation about the Project development progress
Agency Protection Forest and current status of the IESE;
Management
■ Obtain input on impacts of the Project relating to forest
management in the Project area; and
■ Gain feedback/perceptions on the Project development.

Local ■ PC of Huong Hoa ■ Update the authority about Project development progress and
authorities District; current status of the IESE including land acquisition process;
■ LFDC; ■ Obtain to-date socio-economic data/information including
infrastructure and public services development of the commune,

Interview Organisations Topics Covered in the meetings interview

Groups
■ PC of Tan Lap and health, livelihoods and employment of the people in the
Tan Lien Communes commune;
■ Gain feedback/perceptions on the Project development; and
■ Ask for permission and support from the PC to conduct the
household survey in the area.
6.2.1.2 Engagement with Local Communities for Baseline Data and Perceptions
Simultaneously, the Project team and ERM organised multiple engagement activities at the local
community level from 4 May to 7 May 2020 mainly to collect the updated socio-economic baseline data
and local communities’ opinions and concerns on the development of the Projects. The consultations
were in the form of Focus Group Discussions (FGDs), Key Informant Interviews (KIIs) and household
surveys as discussed below.
6.2.1.2.1 Focus Group Discussions

Focus Group Discussion was chosen as a tool to elicit households’ subjective attitudes and experiences
by grouping people with similar livelihood profiles or household economic conditions. Each group
included 8 - 11 participants for a discussion within 60 minutes. Focus group was homogenous in a
manner that it represented the affected households. Six groups of project affected people and fence-
line communities have been engaged in the FGDs. The details of participants of FGD was presented in
the Table 6.2.
Table 6.2 Details of FGDs
Grou Location Type of Total number Number of Number of Number of Number of

p No. FGD of females males Kinh people Van Kieu
participants people
1 Women 11 8 3 11 0
2 Tan Lap Forestry 9 0 9 9 0

Commune
3 Van Kieu 11 4 7 0 11
4 Agriculture 9 4 5 0 9
5 Tan Lien Agriculture 8 1 7 8 0

Commune
6 Vulnerable 8 2 6 8 0
Total 56 19 34 36 20
6.2.1.2.2 Key Informant Interviews

The KIIs were conducted with three village heads of the two communes including Tan Lap and Tan
Lien. Among three village heads attending the KIIs, one of them is Van Kieu people while two ones are
Kinh people. The KIIs were semi-structured with major questions prepared in advance in the form of
open-ended questions and a statistic data table. The questions concentrated on general information
about the community, infrastructure, ethnicity, vulnerable groups, education, livelihoods and
employment, health, cultural heritage and perceptions about the Project.

6.2.1.2.3 Household Surveys

In order to understand the socio-economic baseline including current livelihoods, income, health profile
and the awareness and concerns of the affected communities about the Project, face-to-face interviews
were undertaken for 97 households living in Tan Lien and Tan Lap Communes. Primary data from the
household surveys were used to form the socio-economic baseline section of the IESE report and to
propose livelihood restoration and community development plans of the Project. Topics of engagement
and feedback including concerns and suggestions from the FGDs, KIIs and household surveys are
summarised in Table 6.3.
Table 6.3 Summary of Stakeholder Engagement Activities during IESE Process
Interviewed Organisations Topics covered in the interview meetings

Group
Commune PC of Communes ■ Update the authority with Project development;

Authorities ■ Obtain to-date socio-economic data/information including
infrastructure and public services development of the
Communes, health, livelihoods and employment of the people in
the Communes;
■ Gain feedback/perceptions on the Project development; and

■ Ask for acceptance and support from the People’s Committees
to conduct the household survey in the area.
Focus Groups Van Kieu ethnic ■ Each group will have different question design, in general, the
minority group, following information was collected from the interviewed groups
women group, of FGD:
agriculture and ■ Demographic information of the affected villages;
forestry group and
■ Main livelihoods in this community area;
vulnerable group
■ Investment cost for and income from their main livelihoods;
■ Vulnerable status (i.e. who by virtue of gender, ethnicity, age,
physical or mental disability, economic disadvantage, or social
status that may be more adversely affected by the Project
development); and
■ Awareness of the Project and any concern about the Project

development.
Key Informant Three village ■ The questionnaire of the KII interview was designed to collect
Interviews heads: the following:
■ Bu Village; ■ The history and organizational structure;

■ Tan Hao ■ Housing and land (i.e. land use and land tenure);
Village; and ■ Main livelihoods in this community area;
■ Tan Thuan ■ Infrastructure status;
Village.
■ Access to and availability of public facilities (i.e. electricity, water
supply, etc.);
■ Financial situation;
■ Future-oriented development; and

Interviewed Organisations Topics covered in the interview meetings

Group
■ Awareness on the development of the Project and its

engagement activities.
Household 97 households ■ The questionnaire of the household interview was designed to

Surveys living in Tan Lien collect the following:
and Tan Lap ■ Family status and demographics;
Communes
■ Vulnerable status (i.e. who by virtue of gender, ethnicity, age,
physical or mental disability, economic disadvantage, or social
status that may be more adversely affected by the Project
development);
■ Livelihoods and employment (i.e. their livelihoods/employment);

■ Household income and expenditure;
■ Housing and land (i.e. land use and land tenure);
■ Education background (i.e. education level of members in the
surveyed households);
■ Health status/profile and health care practice;

■ Access to and availability of public facilities (i.e. electricity, water
supply, etc.); and
■ Awareness on the development of the Project and its

engagement activities.
6.2.1.3 Concerns from the Interviewed Authorities and Communities

The concerns of local authorities and people regarding environmental, health and safety, social and
economic issues relating to the Project collected from the aforementioned engagement activities are
summarised in Table 6.4 and Table 6.5.
Table 6.4 Concerns from Authorities during IESE Engagement
Item Concerns
Environment ■ Noise pollution due to impacts of the Project;

■ Effect on volume of water and local irrigation structure during construction phase;
■ Impacts on climate in the surrounding area
Social, economic, ■ Impacts on agricultural production (cultivation and husbandry); and

cultural issues ■ Impacts on livelihood and/or income in the future;
■ Land acquisition
Health & Safety ■ Impacts on health in the surrounding area; and

■ Transportation route and schedule;
Technical issues ■ None

Table 6.5 Concerns from Communities during IESE Engagement
Item Concerns
Environment ■ Polluted environment and biodiversity during the Project implementation process;
■ Impacts on climate in the surrounding area
Social, economic, ■ Concern on land acquisition and compensation;

cultural issues ■ Affecting cultivation season and animal husbandry;
■ Impacts on local livelihoods (farming and husbandry);
■ Affecting local route and traffic safety situation due to the Project’s heavy transportation;
and
■ Concern on the order security situation and the social evils of the immigrant workforce
Health ■ Impacts on health in the surrounding area
Technical issues ■ Soil erosion, landslide due to construction work; and

■ Effect of volume of water during construction phase
6.2.1.4 Recommendations from the Interviewed Authorities and Community

The key topics arising from the above meetings were in relation to queries regarding how the Project
would benefit local communities in terms of employment opportunities and trainings for affected people
and how the development would affect the environment and human health. During the engagement,
Project team emphasised that the IESE process had been looking at all potential effects of the Project
on environmental and social aspects; the results of stakeholder engagement activities would be used
to influence the design of the project and mitigation measures would be recommended to minimise any
potentially negative effects. Summary of recommendations from interviewed parties is outlined below;
further details are provided in Appendix N.
Table 6.6 Recommendations from Stakeholder Engagement during IESE Process
Item Recommendations Authorities Communities
Environmental Comply with all relevant regulatory requirements on 

environmental protection to minimize potential
environmental issues during Project’s construction and
operations phases
Social Priorities local recruitment to support local improvement  
Conduct social management programs to support project  

affected people
Engage relevant stakeholders to increase awareness of 

Project’s development plan, construction schedule and
potential impacts in a timely manner
Develop local infrastructure (build new concrete roads, well  

construction for local water supply and renovate the
community houses)
Carry out asset inventory in accordance with the process 

and regulations and compensate and support for Project
affected people

Item Recommendations Authorities Communities
Prevent surrounding area from risks of health 
Technical Measures and well prepared mitigation plan to against slip  

and landslide during the construction phase
According to the findings from the survey with local households, KIIs, and FGDs with local groups in
the surveyed areas, Table 6.7 presents the needs for community development including livelihood
development, employment opportunities, and infrastructure improvement in the surveyed villages and
local recommendations for the Project.
Table 6.7 Local Needs and Recommendations
Village, Needs for Community Recommendations for the Project

Commune Development
Bu Village, Tan ■ Local infrastructure ■ Project information related to implementation time and
Lap Commune comprising of the progress and compensation policies needs to be fully
construction of a football updated to the locals through community consultations.
court and improvement of the
■ Vocational training helps affected households in work
current gravity water supply
switch after land acquisition.
system needs to be taken
into consideration. ■ Broadening employment possibilities is a focal need.
■ Crop diversification for
cultivation communities
needs to be promoted.
Tan Thuan ■ General health check-ups ■ Land measurement survey should be undertaken with
village, Tan Lap are provided to women. the participation of the affected households.
Commune
■ Compensation prices for land and trees need to be
reasonably considered.
■ The Project should inform the locals about the
implementation time so that local people can make
plans for their cultivation activities.
■ Mitigation strategies to land erosion caused by the

Project construction should be taken.
■ More job opportunities are offered to local people,
especially women.
■ Roads constructed during the Project implementation

may be handed over for local use.
Tan Hao ■ Local infrastructure such as ■ Direct dialogues between the Project and affected
village, Tan inter-village roads and street households should be more productive for mutual
Lien Commune lighting system needs to be understanding.
reinforced.
■ Working with affected households during land
■ Water supply for agricultural acquisition requires flexibility to gain agreement
production and domestic use between the Project and the locals.
needs to be improved.
■ Public meeting will help the locals and the Project share
the same understanding and reach agreement.
■ Employment needs to be prioritized for the locals.

6.2.2 Stakeholder Engagement in September 2020

The second visit was conducted from 03 to 08 September 2020 with local authorities at both district and
communal levels and affected ethnic minority communities. The purpose of this site visit was to:
 Present an update on project design, project activities, preliminary impacts of the project and
mitigation measures;
 Disclose the Stakeholder Engagement Plan, Community Grievance Procedure, and Worker
Grievance;
 Obtain local consultation on the development of livelihood restoration and ethnic minority
development programs; and
 Facilitate dialogical communication between the project and local authorities and affected
communities.
The engagement event included the meeting with:
 District: Huong Hoa DPC;
 Commune: Tan Lap and Tan Lien Communes PC (Lien Lao Project) ;
 Ethnic Minority Communities: Bu Village, Tan Lap Commune (Lien Lap Project) ;
 Project level:
- Worker camp of 384 Company; and
- Worker camp of Song Da 5 Company.
- During engagement event, the following concerns have been noted:
 Land acquisition decision and payment for displaced households;
 Impacts of construction activities on adjacent cultivated land plots of local villagers;
 Potential impacts of the construction on the upstream water supply of some nearby villages;
 Potential impacts of the excavated Spoil disposal sites on the cultivated areas downwards; and
 Some locally-developed production roads were cut through and made inaccessible by the current
Project’s construction activities of Lien Lap Project. Local people requested urgent actions from the
Project to make their roads to be resumed a normal status when their harvesting season comes
soon.
Detailed discussion of these above concern will be provided in a separate Public Disclosure and
Community Consultation Report. Minutes of meetings and list of attendees is mentioned in Appendix
N. It was noted that all of the mentioned concerns above were addressed in this IESE report and
provided with mitigation measures.
6.2.3 Stakeholder Engagement in November 2020

The visit from 8 to 10 November 2020 was to obtain the information from local communities (including
Heads of villages and local people) regarding concern of Project’s updated status, information of local
communities on NTFP and understand on gender equality.
The visit has conducted KII with Heads of the villages affected by the Project area as mentioned in the
Table below:
Table 6.8 Engagement Activities in November 2020
Commune Village KII Date of engagement
Tan Lap Bu 1 8 November 2020

Commune Village KII Date of engagement
Tan Thuan 1 8 November 2020
Tan Tai 1 9 November 2020
Tan Lien Tan Hao 1 8 November 2020
Total 4
Source: Socio-economic survey by ERM, November 2020

The discussions during the engagement were presented in the following tables below:
Table 6.9 Concerns about the Project’s Development
Concerns about the Project Tan Lap Commune Tan Lien Commune
Bu Tan Thuan Tan Tai Tan Hao
Loss of agricultural land and crops    
Loss of income or livelihoods    
Landslides  
Traffic and pressure on the current road  

system
Table 6.10 Overview of NTFP Collection Activity
Features Bu Tan Thuan Tan Tai Tan Hao
NTFP collection 20 households collect bamboo shoot, NA NA NA

households vernicia montana fruit, and thysanolaena
latifolia leaves in the protection forest area
of Tan Lap commune
Distance from house to the 2-3 km to the north of Tan Lap commune
NTFP collection area
Transportation means On foot or by motorbike
Time spent on going to the 2 hours

NTFP collection area
Frequency of NTFP Almost daily during the NTFP season when

collection they have time
Products Bamboo shoot

Vernicia montana fruit
Thysanolaena latifolia leaves
Average NTFP income per VND 4 million

year per household

Table 6.11 Project Impacts on NTFP Collection
Project impacts on Tan Lap Commune Tan Lien

NTFP collection Commune
Bu Tan Thuan Tan Tai Tan Hao
Yes
No    
Explanation The NTFP collection area of local

villagers is not within the Project
area
6.2.4 Stakeholder Engagement in December 2020

This Information Disclosure and Consultation Program was conducted with local authorities (district and
commune levels) and nine (9) Project’s affected villages from 14 to 16 December 2020. A total of 83
local participants (villagers, village and communal leaders, affected households by land acquisition, and
ethnic minority people) participated in the village meetings and focus group discussions, of which 36
people (43.3 %) are females and 11 people are ethnic minority people (Van Kieu) (see Table 6.12).
Five district and commune authority officers attended the Information Disclosure and Consultation
session organised with local authorities.
The objectives of the Information and Consultation Program was to present the following: (i) results of
impact assessments of the Project to local people and local authorities; (ii) proposed mitigation and
beneficial measures for the identified impacts by the Project; (iii) support and development measures
to the ethnic minority communities in the project area as well as the livelihood restoration measures to
affected persons by land acquisition of the Project; (iv) schedule and arrangements for implementation
of the agreed mitigation, beneficial and development measures; and (v) grievance redress mechanism
to ensure that all avenues for airing grievances are available and all grievances and complaints by local
people, affected persons and local ethnic minority communities, if any, in all the aspects of the Project
are resolved in a timely and satisfactory manner. Details of the opinions, suggestions and concerns of
local people and local authorities, affected persons and ethnic minority communities on the above
mentioned issues are presented in Appendix S, fully incorporated and addressed this IESE and related
management plans (see Table 6.13).

Table 6.12 Statistics of Participants in the December 2020 Information Disclosure and Consultation Program
No Date Organisations / Number of Gender Ethnicity Impacted by

Villages Participants Land Shadow Other construction and
acquisition Flicker (WCS) operation activities
Male Female Van Kieu Kinh
Local Communities
1 Tan Thuan village, 9 6 3 0 9 3 NA 6
Tan Lap commune
14 December 2020
2 Bu village, Tan Lap 10 4 6 10 0 3 NA 7

commune
3 Tan Tai village, Tan 10 5 5 0 10 1 NA 9
Lap commune
4 Tan Hao village, Tan 10 7 3 0 10 1 2 7
Lien commune
5 Tan Son village, Tan 10 4 6 0 10 NA 10 NA
Lap commune
6 Tan Vinh village, 7 5 2 0 7 4 NA 3
15 December 2020
Huong Tan commune

7 Tan Hoa village, Tan 15 7 8 0 15 NA 5 10
Lien commne
8 Hiep Hoa village, Tan 8 6 2 0 8 NA 4 4
Lien commune
9 Residential area 7, 4 3 1 1 3 3 NA 1
Khe Sanh town
Total 83 47 36 11 72 15 21 47
Percentage (%) 100 56.63 43.37 13.25 86.75 18.07 25.30 56.63
Local Authorities
10 Huong Hoa DPC; Tan 5 5 0 0 5 NA NA NA
16 December
Thanh CPC; Tan Lap

2020
CPC; Tan Lien CPC

Table 6.13 Impacts Raised by Affected Villagers and Measures Committed by the Project
Owner
No Impacts Measures Notes
Positive Impacts
1 Easier travels and The Project Owner will soon complete the access
economic roads (Dec 2020)
development by the The Project Owner will coordinate with other project
construction of the owners and local authorities to regularly
access roads maintenance the access roads to keep the roads as
good roads.
2 Local labours are The Project Owner established targets of engaging: Has been specified in the
employed More than 20% labours is local labours during contracts with construction
project construction stage; contractors
20% labours is local labours during project Will be in the project’s

operation stage; employment plan.
3 Better selling foods, The Project Owner committed to local procurement,

farming products including foods, materials and equipement which
and others by local are available in the local markets.
people
4 Effective supports of The supports will be continued based on the The Year End 2020 Support
the Project Owner framework of livelihood restoration and ethnic Program of the Project
to the villages minority development plan and assessment of local Owner to the locals
needs. (construction of water wells,
assistance for vulnerable
households, etc.) has been
announced and will be
implemented in December,
2020.
5 Reduce of The operation of the wind farm projects themselves Trau trees are scheduled to
greenhouse gas produces no greenhouse gas emission. In addition, be chronologically planted
emissions the Project Owner plans to plant Trau trees at the once a spoil disposal site is
soil disposal sites. This contributes to absorb completed from January
carbon dioxide and release oxygen into the air. 2021.
The Project is expected to provide a potential
saving of 136,983 tonnes of carbon dioxide
emission per year over the Projects’ lifetime.
Negative Impacts
1 Soil of excavation Soil of excavation activities of the access roads will Mitigation measures to
activities of the be transported away at end of day every-day. prevent soil erosions have
project may be Spoil disposal sites will be fenced and other not yet been implemented for
washed-out under measures will be implemented in December 2020 all the spoil disposal sites of
rains to the to prevent soil erosions. the Projects
production land and
may contaminate
the water source of
the villagers.

No Impacts Measures Notes
2 Blades operation Project Owner will organize a trip to the

would dry crops and representatives of villagers to visit the areas that
negatively impact the blades are in operation (Huong Linh Project) to
on trees. observe that crops and trees are not affected by the
blades operation.
Project Owner will together with villagers to verify
the impacts of blades during operation stage.
3 Temporary impact The Project will request construction contractors to Compensation for affected
on land during prepare and implement the suitable construction crops by temporary impact
construction and the methods to mitigate the impacts on land of villagers during construction must be
issues of 35 kV during construction. = Yield of the crop per a m2
transmission line Project Owner will closely monitor the temporary x affected land area (m2) x
ROW. impacts on land of villagers during construction. affected harvesting seasons
(time period of impact) x
Villagers can inform the Project Owner on the
market cost of the crop for a
impacts to the phone numbers that are indicated in
kg.
the provided booklet.
Yield of crop: Average yield
Compensation will be provided satisfactorily to the
of a harvesting season (kg)
affected households.
of recent three successive
Project Owner will adjust the alignment (route) of seasons
the 35 kV TL’s ROW during detailed design stage
Construction contractors
in consultations with the affected households and
must restore the soil to the
communities.
quality as before being
affected to return to the
households.
4 Shadow flicker Project Owner will organise a trip to the

representatives of relevant villagers to visit a wind
power project (Huong Linh Project) to observe the
impact of the shadow flicker.
Project Owner will together with villagers of relevant
villages to verify the impacts during operation stage
and to implement suitable measures to minimize
the impact.
Relocation option has been presented and
disclosed to impacted households and local
communities.
5 Use of village road Project Owner requested the construction

to the project sites constructors to not use the village road (and other
by the construction village roads as well) from 15 December 2020.
contractors. Violations of construction constructors shall trigger
penalties as envisaged in the signed contracts of
the contractors with PCC1.
Project Owner will closely monitor the use of village
roads by the contractors.
Villagers can inform the Project Owner on the use
of village roads by construction contractors to the
phone numbers that are indicated in the provided in
the Project’s booklet delivered to the villagers.

INITIAL ENVIRONMENTAL AND SOCIAL EXAMINATION REPORT ENVIRONMENTAL BASELINE
7. ENVIRONMENTAL BASELINE
7.1 Introduction
This section provides an overview of environmental baseline conditions within the Project area and its
surroundings, including topography and geology conditions, climate and meteorology, ambient air
quality, soil and water quality, and terrestrial biodiversity.
The objective of this section is to outline the existing environmental conditions in the Project area. This
information is used to assess potential impacts caused by the Project in both construction and operation
phases and provide mitigation measures and/or monitoring programs to reduce adverse impacts.
Information in this chapter is primarily based on studies undertaken for the Feasibility Study Report
(Lien Lap FSR, 2020) and a desktop review of reliable information sources such as Quang Tri Province
Portal (Quang Tri Province Portal, 2019) as well as the additional noise, avifauna and terrestrial fauna
and flora baseline studies undertaken in 2020 by ERM’s subcontractors with the supervision of ERM
during the IESE preparation process.
7.2 Climate and Meteorology

Data on climate and meteorology are primarily obtained from the Feasibility Study Report for Lien Lap
Wind Farm Project (Lien Lap FSR, 2020), the website of Quang Tri Province (Quang Tri Province Portal,
2019) and from Khe Sanh Meteorological Station which is approximately 6.5 km from the Lien Lap Wind
Farm). Other meteorology and hydrology Stations in Quang Tri Province have been identified including
Gia Vong, Cua Viet, Dong Ha, Thach Han and Con Co Stations (Figure 7.1).
Figure 7.1 Locations of Meteorology and Hydrology Stations in Quang Tri Province

7.2.1 Temperature
Quang Tri Province has a tropical monsoon climate, with annual average temperature between 24-25°C
in low terrains and between 22-23 C at an altitude of over 500 masl (Quang Tri Province Portal 2019).
The Province undergoes two (2) distinct seasons, including
 Winter season lasts over three (03) months (December through February). The temperature in
winter season could go down to 22 C in low plains or 20 C at high altitude of over 500 masl (Quang
Tri Province Portal 2019).
 Summer season is between May and August with a high average temperature of 28 °C.
Temperatures are highest between June and July and they can go up to 42 C (Quang Tri Province
Portal 2019). High temperatures in the areas are considered favourable for some agricultural and
industrial plants (Quang Tri Province Portal 2019).
The average monthly temperature in Huong Hoa District fluctuates between 18.1°C and 26.3°C (Figure
7.2). Temperatures differ significantly between winter and summer seasons, including:
 Winter season: average monthly temperatures are between 18°C and 19.3°C (Figure 7.2); and
 Summer season: average monthly temperatures can go up to above 26°C (Figure 7.2).
Source: Khe Sanh Meteorology Station
Figure 7.2 Average Monthly Temperature in Huong Hoa District (1998 – 2017)
7.2.2 Relative Humidity

Relative humidity in Quang Tri Province is considered high with an annual average of between 83%
and 88%. In the rainy months, the average relative humidity is approximately 85% and it sometimes
can go up to 90%. Humidity on the eastern and western sides of Truong Son Mountain Range fluctuates
over time and it could deep as low as 22% in April (Quang Tri Province Portal, 2019).
The average monthly humidity in Huong Hoa District fluctuates between 84.5% and 90.7% (Figure 7.3).
Minimum monthly humidity usually occurs during the summer season (April through July) and it could
go down to 83% in May (Figure 7.3).

Figure 7.3 Average Monthly Humidity in Huong Hoa District (1998 - 2017)
7.2.3 Evaporation
Due to the high percentage of air humidity, the amount of evaporation in the area is not large. In detail,
the monthly evaporation measured in the area varies between 41.6 and 105.0 mm (Figure 7.4).
Evaporation can peak above 100 mm per month in May and June and it can dip below 40.0 mm per
month in December (Figure 7.4).
Figure 7.4 Monthly Evaporation (1977 – 2017)
7.2.4 Fog
Fog usually occurs during the spring monsoons from December through March, causing limited visibility
in the area. Heavy fog and light rains can occur in the area particularly in January and February. The
average number of foggy days per year recorded by Khe Sanh Meteorological Station in the period of
2007 to 2018 is between 58 and 149 days (Quang Tri Province Portal, 2019). Of this, maximum numbers

of foggy days can go up to 19.3 days per month between December through March and minimum
numbers of foggy days are between 1.3 and 4.8 days per month between May and August (Figure 7.5).
Figure 7.5 Average Number of Foggy Days per Month in Huong Hoa District (2007 – 2018)
7.2.5 Sun Hours

The average sun hours in Huong Hoa District varies between 87 and 260 hours per month (Figure 7.6).
Sun hours can peak above 200 hours per month sometime between May and August; while minimum
monthly sun hours can be lower than 150 hours during the autumn and winter months (November
through next February) (Figure 7.6).
Source: Hue meteorological station
Figure 7.6 Average Monthly Sun Hours in Huong Hoa District (2019 – 2020)

7.2.6 Wind Regime
7.2.6.1 Wind Regime in Quang Tri Province

Information of wind speed in Huong Hoa District, Quang Tri Province is provided by Khe Sanh
Meteorology Station in the period of 1998 to 2018 (Figure 7.7). The average wind speed is between 1.5
and 2.5 m/s (Figure 7.7). Wind speed has increased in the same period and eastern winds are recorded
to be approximately 0.3m/s higher than western winds (Lien Lap FSR, 2019).
The northeast and east-northeast winds are dominant between December and April; while the northwest
and west-northwest winds are most active between May and July (Quang Tri Province Portal, 2019).
Wind velocity for the Project area is also measured at different heights (77 and 60 m) and it is illustrated
in Figure 7.7. Findings from the wind roses in Figure 7.8 are presented below:
 At 77m: Winds blow from the west-southwest for more than 33% of the time, followed by winds
from the northeast (~32%), east-northeast (~17%) and southwest (~6%) (Figure 7.8); and
 At 60m: winds blow from the west-southwest for more than 27% of the time, followed by winds from
east-northeast (almost 25%), northeast (~ 24%) and southwest (less than 5%) (Figure 7.8).
According to the Feasibility Study Report, overall characteristics of winds in the Project area can be
summarized below:
 The main wind directions are from the northeast and west-southwest;
 Wind speed is relatively stable during day and among months in a year;
 Wind frequency is high and can enable power generation for 90% of the time;
 Wind regimes differ at varying heights;
 The average annual wind speed is 7.54 m/s at the height of 80m above the ground; and
 Wind speeds above 3 m/s –which is the minimum speed needed for wind power generation account
for 91.7%.
Figure 7.7 Wind Speed (1998 - 2018)

7.2.6.2 Wind Regime in the Project Area

To assess wind potential in the project area, automatic measuring devices with frequency of 10
minutes/time were put in the measurement area from December 2017 to December 2018 and the data
collected was saved in the data storage (Datalogger). Data storage is set to display and store data for
sensors as follows:
 Channel 1 (Ch1): sensor used to measure wind direction at an altitude of 80 m.
 Channel 2 (Ch2): sensor used to measure wind speed at an altitude of 80 m.
 Channel 16 (Ch16): sensor used to measure temperature at an altitude of 80 m.
 Channel 17 (Ch17): sensor used to measure air pressure at an altitude of 80 m.
 Channel 18 (Ch18): sensor used to measure humidity at an altitude of 80 m.
The analytical results of wind measurement are as follows:
 The prevailing wind direction:
In terms of wind direction, there are two main seasonal directions including East - Northeast and West
– Southwest direction. Months with the strongest winds are January (corresponding to the North-East
monsoon) and July (with the South-West monsoon). The months with weak winds are in May and
September corresponding to the transition period of the monsoon season.

Source: Lien Lap FSR, 2020
Figure 7.8 Wind Rose at 77m (Left) and 60m (Right) (1998 – 2018)

The variation of average wind speed in months of a year at a number of different heights has the same
shape. In detail, wind speed tends to decrease from January to mid-May, then gradually increases and
reaches a peak in mid-July. After that, the wind speed decreases moderately before rising sharply in
the last months of the year.
Table 7.1 Average Monthly Wind Speed (m/s)
Month Average wind speed for 1 hour at different altitudes
80 m (Ch1) 80 m (Ch2) 60 m (Ch3) 40 m (Ch4)
0 7.229 7.295 7.179 6.778
1 7.287 7.357 7.227 6.815
2 7.403 7.478 7.344 6.925
3 7.476 7.552 7.409 6.995
4 7.550 7.629 7.480 7.060
5 7.671 7.749 7.594 7.158
6 7.591 7.667 7.497 7.051
7 7.455 7.521 7.374 6.984
8 7.474 7.527 7.444 7.149
9 7.615 7.658 7.607 7.343
10 7.678 7.709 7.670 7.411
11 7.769 7.797 7.768 7.517
12 7.636 7.667 7.637 7.390
13 7.608 7.642 7.612 7.358
14 7.655 7.689 7.670 7.417
15 7.704 7.740 7.695 7.428
16 7.700 7.741 7.674 7.395
17 7.600 7.651 7.526 7.188
18 7.470 7.527 7.414 7.050
19 7.401 7.460 7.340 6.972
20 7.285 7.345 7.243 6.874
21 7.167 7.234 7.135 6.763
22 7.122 7.189 7.072 6.690
23 7.133 7.203 7.085 6.687
Average 7.487 7.543 7.446 7.100

7.2.7 Rainfall
According to Quang Tri Portal, the average annual rainfall in Quang Tri Province ranges from 2,200 to
2,500 mm. Maximum rainfalls usually occur from September through December and they distribute to
over 70% of the annual rainfall. The number of rainy days in the Province is between 154 and 190 days
per year (Quang Tri Province Portal, 2019).
The monthly rainfall in Khe Sanh Town greatly varies throughout the year to be between 18.1mm and
430mm per month and it could reach 430 mm in October (Figure 7.9). Maximum rainfalls usually occur
between August and November, contributing approximately 72.8% of the annual rainfall in Huong Hoa
District (Quang Tri Province Portal, 2019).
Sources: Khe Sanh Meteorological Stations
Figure 7.9 Average Rainfall in Khe Sanh Town (1998 – 2018)
7.2.8 Natural Hazards
7.2.8.1 Typhoons and Tropical Depressions

A total of 12 tropical depressions and typhoons per year occurred in Viet Nam East Sea between 1959
and 2015 (MONRE 2016). Approximately 7 tropical depressions and typhoons impacted Vietnam every
year and 5 of them moved into the mainland (MONRE 2016). Tropical depressions and typhoons are
most active in the north of East Sea and they tend to increase in intensity (Figure 7.10), last longer and
move southward (MONRE 2016).
Quang Tri Province is located in the area vulnerable to storms which usually occur in September and
October (Quang Tri Province Portal, 2019). On average, there are approximately 1.2 - 1.3 storms per
year in the Province (Quang Tri Province Portal, 2019). For storms which affect the Province’s mainland
usually last between 8 and 10 hours but their accompanied rains usually last up to 3 days (Quang Tri
Province Portal, 2019). The number of storms and tropical depressions which directly affect the
Province tends to decrease slightly (Quang Tri Province Portal, 2019). Storms with strong wind intensity
accompanied by heavy rains could cause flash floods, affecting agricultural production and people's
safety in the area.

Source: MONRE 2016
Figure 7.10 Typhoons with Wind Exceeding 12 Category in Beaufort Scale in Vietnam East
Sea (1990-2015)
7.2.8.2 Floods
Quang Tri Province is sloping from the West to the east and to the southeast and it encompasses
mountains, midland, narrow plains and coastal areas (Quang Tri Province Portal, 2019). Given that the
rivers and streams on the west of Truong Son Mountain Range are short and steep, narrow plains and
midland areas are prone to floods and flash floods when it rains heavily. The topography and drainage
system is shown in Figure 7.11. In addition, storms and floods often occur between July and December,
especially in August to October (Quang Tri Province Portal, 2019). The list of floods recorded in Quang
Tri Province is presented in Table 7.2.

Figure 7.11 Topography and Drainage System
Table 7.2 List of Floods in Quang Tri Province
Rivers Date of flooding Warming level
Thach Han River 17 October 2008 II
Thach Han River 14 October 2007 III
Thach Han River 30 September 2006 -
Thach Han River 15 October 2001 II
Thach Han River 01 November 1999 III
Thach Han River 16 October 2014 III
Ben Hai River 28 October 1981 II
Ben Hai River 7 October 1992 III
Ben Hai River 8 October 2005 III
Ben Hai River 30 September 2009 II
Source: Quang Tri Province Portal, 2019
7.2.8.3 Extreme Weather

Quang Tri Province is also prone to extreme weather conditions associated with thunderstorms, strong
winds and heavy rains. Days of extreme weather in the Province is approximately 57.3 days per year
(Quang Tri Province Portal, 2019); while it is between 54 and 63 days per year in Huong Hoa District

(Figure 7.12). Extreme weather in the District usually occurs between April and September and the
number of days can go up to 13 days in May (Figure 7.12).
Source: Khe Sanh Meteorological Station
Figure 7.12 Days of Extreme Weather in Huong Hoa District (2007 - 2018)
7.3 Topography and Terrain

Lien Lap Wind Farm is located in the western and north-western part of Quang Tri province and situated
in low-hilly areas which are sloping from southwest to northeast. The landform in the project area is
mostly hilly terrain in which mountains alternate with rivers to form the rough terrain (divided by the
rivers, canals, and temporary streams). Rivers and streams originate from the high mountain.
The area has an elevation from 450 – 520 masl whilst the construction area is located in the western
mountainous area of Quang Tri province. The study area is mostly mountainous terrain, has an
elevation from 150 – 1000 masl, and slope from 20 – 30° (steep slope) and could go up to 40 – 50°
(very steep slope). The topography map is shown in Figure 7.11. Due to the strongly fractured terrain
and steep slope, erosion and washout processes are strong. Most of the landform is steep, fractured,
and there are lots of streams and rivers. Therefore, building infrastructure (e.g. transportation and
electrical grid) will be difficult, especially in movement.
7.4 Geology
7.4.1 Geological Condition

Within the survey area, stratigraphy is distributed with layers, in particular:
Layer 1: Dark-brown sandy dust soil, moderate plasticity. Porosity is moderate. Status is from hard to
semi-hard. The layer is mostly distributed in 110kV substation and 110kV transmission line. At the
substation, the thickness of the layer is from 6.5 – 8.0 m.
Layer 2: Grey-yellow coarse sandy (0.5 – 1 mm grain size) dust soil, quartz particles and gravel, low
plasticity. Porosity is moderate. Status is semi-hard. These are the weathering products from
granodiorite rock. The thickness of the layer could go up to 14 m.
Layer 3: Cobble, basalt boulder, and grey-brown porous basalt rock. The rock in this layer has been
slightly weathered. At the substation, the layer is distributed at the depth 8.0 m at borehole HK2, 6.5 m
at borehole HK3 to the end of the survey depth. The thickness and the boundary of the layer is not
identified.

Layer 4: White-grey diorite quartzite and granodiorite rock are under strong weathering process. The
rock in the layer has a dense crack system. The origin is from Tra Bong igneous complex.
7.4.2 Geotechnical Condition

The physico-mechanical properties of soil layers is shown in Table 7.3.
Table 7.3 Physico-Mechanical Properties of Soil Layers
Soil layer name Layer 2 Layer 4
Particle Grain size Size (mm) Unit
Particle and Clay < 0.002 % 5.3

grain size
Dust Fine 0.002 – 0.005 % 8.4
composition
Moderate 0.005 – 0.02 % 0.6
Coarse 0.02 – 0.06 % 8.0
Sand Fine 0.06 – 0.08 % 3.1
Small 0.08 – 0.2 % 9.2
Moderate 0.2 – 0.5 % 7.7
Coarse 0.5 – 2.0 % 32.2
Gravel Small 2.0 – 5.0 % 13.4
Moderate 5.0 – 20.0 % 2.1
Coarse 20.0 – 150 % 0.0
Atterberg Liquid limit WT % 35.3

limits
Plastic limit WP % 22.1
Plastic index WN % 13.2
Physical Moisture We % 23.1 4.5

properties
Porosity coefficient ε0 0.782 0.187
Porosity index n % 43.9 15.5
Saturated index G % 79.3
Bearing capacity R0 KG/cm2 1.6
According to geotechnical conditions assessment:

Layer 2: Coarse sandy dust soil, fine quartz particles, and gravel. Soil status is hard distributed from
ground surface to the depth of 14.0 m. The thickness of the layer is from 10.5 – 14.0 m. Average SPT
index is 16.
Layer 4: White-grey diorite quartzite and granodiorite rock have a dense crack system. Cracks are
fulfilled by clay materials from layer 2. The rock hardness is relatively high. The layer was identified at
the depth of 10.5 m at TB03 and 14.0 m at TB07. However, the thickness is not identified due to the
end of the survey depth.

7.5 Hydrology
7.5.1 Hydrology in Quang Tri Province

Quang Tri Province has a dense network of canals and rivers (e.g Tam Giang, Ganh Hao, Bay Hap,
Song Doc, Huong Hoa, The Ship, Trem Trem Rivers). There are three (03) main river systems in the
Province, including:
 Thach Han River System (also called Quang Tri River): include 37 rivers which have 17 branches
at level 1 (e.g. Vinh Phuoc, Rao Quan and Cam Lo Brances), 13 branches at level 2 and 6 branches
at level 313. The system has a river net density of 0.92, an averaged elevation of 301 m and is
lopping at 20.1%. The length of the System is approximately 156km, measured based on its longest
river. The basin is 36.8 km wide at average and has a total area of approximately 2660 km2;
 Ben Hai River System has a basin capacity of approximately 809 km2 and it is approximately 64.5
km long. The basin has an elevation of 115 m and is sloping at 15.7%. The system has a river
network density of 1.15 and a meandering coefficient of 1.43;
 O Lau River System which belongs to My Chanh River running through Tam Gaing lagoon to Thuan
An estuary. The system covers an area of 855 km2 and is approximately 65 km long. The upper
River is running through Thua Thien - Hue Province.
7.5.2 Hydrology in the Project Area

There is no major river traversing the project site, but one natural stream traverses the Project site,
namely Ta Nong stream and one natural stream flows nearby the Project area, namely Tan Tai stream
(see Figure 9.13). These streams are seasonal flows which often become dry in first survey.
Ta Nong stream, locating 700m away from turbine No.12 in the west of Project area, flows in the North
– South direction. Tan Tai stream, locating 450m from turbine No.12 in the east of the Project area
flows nearby the Project site.
7.6 Ambient Air Quality
7.6.1 Sampling Locations

During the scope of IESE, in May 2020, the sampling sites were selected to represent receptors within
a 5km radius which were likely to be impacted by the Project activities, such as residential areas, places
of worship and educational institutions. Microclimatic conditions, and wind speeds and direction were
also taken into account to ensure a comprehensive survey was conducted.
Coordinates and descriptions of the sampling sites are detailed in Table 7.4 and further illustrated in
Figure 7.13.
Table 7.4 Ambient Air Sampling Sites
Site Description Distance from Coordinate (WGS84)

Code sampling location to
Latitude (m) Longitude
nearest wind turbine
(m)
(m)
A1 Mr Son’s house, Tan Hao Village, Tan 350 16.62948680 106.70202741

Liên Commune, Huong Hoa District,
Quang Tri Province
13
River classification by Strahler stream order: https://usgs-
mrs.cr.usgs.gov/NHDHelp/WebHelp/NHD_Help/Introduction_to_the_NHD/Feature_Attribution/Stream_Order.htm

Site Description Distance from Coordinate (WGS84)

Code sampling location to
nearest wind turbine
(m)
(m)
A2 Ms Hoa’s house, Tan Thuan Village, 500 16.61309708 106.68430535

Tan Lap Commune, Huong Hoa
District, Quang Tri Province
A3 Mr Hung’s house, Ban Bu Village, Tan 350 16.62537514 106.69163796

Lap Commune, Huong Hoa District,
Quang Tri Province
Figure 7.13 Air Monitoring Locations
7.6.2 Air Monitoring Procedure

The ambient air quality monitoring was conducted in accordance with the National Technical
Regulations on Ambient Air Quality (QCVN 05:2013/BTNMT) developed by the Vietnam Environmental
Administration, Department of Science and Technology, Department of Legal Affairs alongside Circular
No. 32/2013/TT-BTNMT dated 25 October 2013 issued by the Ministry of Natural Resources and
Environment. Detailed method of specific parameters was described below:
 Particulate matter 10 (PM10) and particulate matter 2.5 (PM2.5) were monitored over 24 hour periods
with a filter rate of 5 L/min.
 Total suspended Particles (TSP), VOCs, sulphur dioxide (SO2), nitrogen dioxide (NO2) and carbon
monoxide (CO) were monitored over 1 hour periods with an air flow rate of 1000 L/min for TSP, 0.5
L/min for VOCs, NO2 and SO2, and 0.05 L/min for CO.

7.6.3 Results and Discussion

All parameters tested were below the limits stipulated by the QCVN 05:2013/BTNMT – National
Technical Regulation on Ambient Air Quality and QCVN 06:2009/BTNMT – National Technical
Regulation on hazardous substances in ambient air. The ambient air quality results are summarized in
Table 7.5 below and the details of result are presented in Appendix M.
Table 7.5 Results of Ambient Air Monitoring
No. Parameters Unit Results QCVN QCVN
A1 A2 A3 05:2013/BTNMT 14
06:2009/BTNMT15
1. SO2 (1h) µg/m3 26 24 28 350 -
2. NO2 (1h) µg/m3 24 20 18 200 -
3. CO (1h) µg/m3 2100 1900 2200 30,000 -
4. TSP (1h) µg/m3 125 110 98 300 -
5. PM10 (24h) µg/m3 20 14 12 150 -
6. PM2.5 (24h) µg/m3 <10 <10 <10 50 -
7. VOCs µg/m3 81.3 35.37 21.5 - -
8. Benzene µg/m3 1.07 0.76 0.55 - 22
9. Toluene µg/m3 4.50 2.84 3.17 - 500

Note: Symbol (-): unstipulated
7.7 Noise Quality

A noise monitoring survey was conducted to collect the noise baseline condition for the Project from
11th May to 13th May 2020. The selection of the monitoring locations and monitoring procedure were
implemented based on the IFC noise management Guidance. Noise measured is assessed against the
IFC Criteria (Table 7.6). Detailed information of the noise survey can be found in Appendix K.
Table 7.6 IFC Noise Level Guidelines
Receptor On Hour LAeq (dBA)
Day time Night time

7:00 – 22:00 22:00 – 7: 00
Residential, institutional, 55 45
educational
Source: IFC General EHS Guidelines – Noise Management, 2007
7.7.1 Sampling Locations

Noise monitoring was conducted at three (03) locations in Tan Lap and Tan Lien commune, Huong Hoa
district, Quang Tri province. These monitoring locations were representative of noise sensitive receptors
around the Project site. Two (02) locations (N1 and N2) of noise survey were in Tan Lap commune, one
location (N3) was in Tan Lien commune. These locations were selected for the monitoring and
described in the Table 7.7 and Figure 7.14.
14
QCVN 05:2013/BTNMT: National Technical Regulation on Ambient Air Quality.
15
QCVN 06:2013/BTNMT: National Technical Regulation on hazardous Substances in ambient air

Table 7.7 Summary of Noise Measurement Locations
Sampling Description of sampling Distance from Coordinates (WGS 84)

Location locations sampling location
to nearest wind Latitude (m) Longitude (m)
turbine (m)
N1 Tan Thuan Village, Tan Lap 460 16.61161111 106.6852778

Commune, Huong Hoa District.
N2 Ban Bu Village, Tan Lap 350 16.62394444 106.6926944

commune, Huong Hoa district
N3 Tan Hao Village, Tan Lien Inside the project 16.63588889 106.6930833
Commune, Huong Hoa District site, distance from
the nearest turbine
(LL03) is 400 m
Figure 7.14 Noise Monitoring Locations
7.7.2 Noise Monitoring Procedure

The noise monitoring procedure was conducted based on the IFC Guideline. LAeq, LA90 and LA10 noise
levels were measured continuously for 48 hours with data logging for every 10 minutes. Weather
conditions (e.g. wind speeds), exciting industrial condition and noise contribution from other noise
sources at the monitoring locations were recorded and used for noise analysis.

7.7.3 Results and Discussion
7.7.3.1 Noise Monitoring Site N1

 Noise level (Leq, 10 minutes) measured for 48 consecutive hours at position N1 with large
fluctuations (ranges from 36.5 to 70.7 dBA).
 Daytime noise was often higher than IFC’s limitation (68.7%). The noise was high around 8:00 –
10:30 when timber trucks travelled the most. The highest noise at 9:06 and 9:56 on 14 May 2020.
 Most of the noise value at night-time (22:00 – 7:00) was lower than 45 dBA (limit of IFC) (accounting
for 66.3%). During the period from 22:40 – 3:40, there was no sound of motorbikes, dogs or insects,
the noise was very low. The lowest noise level measured was 36.5 dBA at 1:00 – 1:20 on
15 May 2020.
 Sources of noise include: timber trucks and motorbikes passing, barking dogs, sound of cicadas
and insects.
Leq N1 IFC Daytime IFC Nighttime

80
70
Noise level Leq (dBA)
60
50
40
30
20
10
0
17:56
18:56
19:56
20:56
21:56
22:56
23:56
10:56
11:56
12:56
13:56
14:56
15:56
16:59
17:59
18:59
19:59
20:59
21:59
22:59
23:59
10:59
11:59
12:59
13:59
14:59
mưa
18:46
0:56
1:56
2:56
3:56
4:56
5:56
6:56
7:56
8:56
9:56
0:59
1:59
2:59
3:59
4:59
5:59
6:59
7:59
8:59
9:59
13/05/2020 14/05/2020 15/05/2020
Start time
Figure 7.15 Leq, 10min (dBA) at Monitoring Site N1
7.7.3.2 Noise Monitoring Site N2

 The N2 position was affected by many different noise sources. Value of Leq,10min ranged from
44.0 to 68.4 dBA.
 42.2% of the daytime measured noise value (Leq,10min) was higher than the IFC standard. The
highest noise at 8:23 to 8:43 on 16 May 2020. Daytime noise was affected by many sources such
as motorbikes, cows, chickens, birds, goats. In the afternoon, there was also the sound of cicadas.
 Nighttime noise was always higher than IFC standards. The evening was influenced by sound of
roosters, dogs, cicadas. The highest noise was 63.8 dBA around 5:00, 17 May 2020.

Figure 7.16 Diagram of Leq, 10min (dBA) in Monitoring Site N2
7.7.3.3 Noise Monitoring Location N3

 Most of the daytime noise levels measured at the N3 site met IFC noise standards (accounting for
93.3%). The lowest value was 38.1 dBA (at 11:50 on 17 May 2020) and the highest value was 60.6
(at 7:46 dated 16 May 2020).
 73.2% of night noise was higher than IFC standard. The lowest noise value at night was 42.1 dBA
at 2:41 on 16 May 2020. The highest noise value was 56.2 dBA at 4:56 on 17 May 2020. At night,
the noise was due to dogs, insects, frogs, cicadas from 3:00 to the next morning also had geckos,
birds, roosters.
Figure 7.17 Diagram of Leq, 10min (dBA) in Monitoring Site N3

7.8 Groundwater Quality

Groundwater samples were collected at two (02) sites of households under the scope of IESE in May
2020. The main purpose of groundwater quality assessment is used for domestic water supply for
project’s activities.
At GW1, the groundwater sample was extracted from a depth of 60m whereas at GW2, the sample was
extracted from a depth of 57 m. Coordinates and descriptions of the sampling sites are detailed in Table
7.8 and further illustrated in Figure 7.18.
Table 7.8 Groundwater Sampling Sites
Site Depth Description Distance from sampling Coordinate (WGS84)

Code (m) location to nearest wind
turbine (m)
GW1 60 m Mr Son’s house, Tan 400 16.62943098 106.70222187

Hao Village, Tan Lien
Commune, Huong Hoa
District, Quang Tri
Province
GW2 57m Mr Hao’s house, Tan 450 16.61337472 106.68372107

Thuan Village, Tan Lap
Commune, Huong Hoa
District, Quang Tri
Province
Figure 7.18 Groundwater Sampling Locations

The ground water taken at two (02) sites showed that all parameters were lower than the allowable
permits of national technical regulation on ground water quality QCVN 09-MT: 2015/BTNMT. In which,
parameters of ammonium, cyanide, cadmium and coliform at two (02) sites and chloride at GW1 were
lower than limit of detection (LOD). The groundwater quality results are summarized in Table 7.9 below
and the details of result are presented in Appendix M.
Table 7.9 Results of Ground Water
No. Parameters Unit Results

Site Description Distance from sampling Coordinate (WGS84)

Code location to nearest wind
turbine (m)
(m)
SW2 Tan Tai Stream, Tan Thuan 640m from turbine LL10 16.65104623 106.63358578
village, Tan Lap commune,
Huong Hoa District, Quang Tri
province
Figure 7.19 Surface Water Sampling Locations

Figure 7.20 Surface Water Sampling Locations with Drainage System

Almost all parameters of the samples were lower than allowed limits of the QCVN 08-MT:2015/BTNMT
(Colum B1 – For irrigated agriculture, irrigation purposes or other purposes which require waterway
transport and other purposes with low quality of water requirements) - National technical regulation on
surface water quality, except for TSS parameter of SW1 sample and Pb level of SW2 sample exceeded
QCVN 08-MT:2015/BTNMT. While, parameters phosphate, cadmium, chromium (VI), chromium (III),
mercury, oil and grease, cyanide, E.coli and coliform at two sites and ammonium parameter at SW2
were shown lower than detection limit of the method. The surface water quality results are summarized
in Table 7.11 below and the details of result are presented in Appendix M.
Table 7.11 Results of Surface Water Monitoring


Figure 7.21 Soil Sampling Locations

The soil quality results are summarized in Table 7.13 below and the details of result are presented in
Appendix M.
Table 7.13 Results of Soil Sample Monitoring
No. Parameters Unit Results QCVN 03-MT:2015/BTNMT

(Agricultural land) (18)

surveys were undertaken by ERM two times in 2020. Desktop reviews included the local regulatory
EMP which received approval in 2019 and other information sources such as journals and online
articles.
7.11.1 Desktop Assessment

This section summarises information from several databases and online data sources on biodiversity
values within the landscape to determine predicted biodiversity values associated with the Project Area.
The following definition of areas have been used:
 The Project Footprint is defined as the development footprint located in the terrestrial zones. It is
the footprint that will be disturbed due to Project’s activities;
 The Study Area encompasses a 50 km buffer of the Project and has been used to identify
biodiversity habitats and values for consideration;
 The Ecologically Appropriate Area for analysis (EAAA) has been defined as required under IFC
PS6 for that species. The EAAA is used to identify the presence of critical habitat for that species
(through application of the IFC PS6 critical habitat thresholds outlined in the IFC PS6 Guidance
Note19); and
 The Project Area of Influence (AoI) is the region can be seen short and long term impacts of
constructions and operations including EAAA that has been assessed to define habitat values in
the immediate project vicinity where species may regularly occur.
The desktop review considered online sources, scientific literature and environmental studies
undertaken within the Study Area. Key sources include:
 NGO webpages and databases including those belonging to the World Wildlife Fund (WWF);
 Alliance for Zero Extinction (AZE);
 BirdLife International;
 Global Biodiversity Information Facility (GBIF);
 International Union for the Conservation of Nature (IUCN) Red List of Threatened Species (the
‘IUCN Red List’) and their profiles;
 IUCN Red List of Ecosystems; and
 Integrated Biodiversity Assessment Tool (IBAT).
The information is combined with field-recorded data obtained from field assessments undertaken for
the Project and used to evaluate potential critical habitat triggers that may be associated with the EAAA
for onshore components. Critical habitat is assessed by screening desktop, historic and survey data to
identify these triggers. Data is screened to determine whether a species or habitat is likely to meet a
critical habitat threshold. The EAAA for this project is discussed in Section 7.11.11.
7.11.2 Ecoregion Description

WWF defines an ecoregion as a “large unit of land or water containing a geographically distinct
assemblage of species, natural communities, and environmental conditions”.
The boundaries of an ecoregion are not fixed and sharp, but rather encompass an area within which
important ecological and evolutionary processes most strongly interact.
The Ecoregion relevant to the Project Area is Northern Annamites Rain Forests [IM0136], which
occupies an area of 22,533 km 2. This Ecoregion lies largely in Lao People's Democratic Republic but
with a significant area across the crest of the Annamite Range in Vietnam. Geological substrates are
19
IFC, 2019

varied over this ecoregion, but there are notable large areas of limestone karst topography (WWF 2020).
The climatic condition in this region changes abruptly throughout the year, especially along the
mountain crest. The area receives an annual rainfall of between 1,500 millimeters and 2,500 millimeters
(World Atlas. 2020). The higher elevation areas of this ecological region experience cooler temperatures
throughout the seasons. Mesic lower montane forests at 800-1,200 m in the northern Annamite Range
generally consist of a two-tiered forest canopy reaching to about 15-25 m in height. The dense canopy
structure of undisturbed humid montane forest allows little light to penetrate to ground level, so
understory vegetation is sparse.
More than half of this ecoregion has been cleared or degraded. However, the forests in the northwest
part of the ecoregion are still in fairly good condition. A large block of montane forest straddles the Laos-
Vietnam border. Nine protected areas cover about 12,200km 2 (26 percent) of the ecoregion including
Ho Ke Go, Nam Kading, Pu Mat, Dong Phong Nha, Phou Xang He, Nakai-Nam Theun, Hin Namno, Vu
Quang, Khammouane Limestone.
Both Laos and Vietnam have begun or are planning to develop several major power schemes that will
inundate large areas of habitat and provide ready access to intact forest areas, thus increasing the
probabilities of further habitat degradation. Major illegal and legal logging and local and transboundary
wildlife poaching and trade (Laos into Vietnam) still occur. The presence of unexploded ordnances
similarly poses a severe threat to wildlife, researchers, and protected area staff.
The following species of conservation interest exist within the Ecoregion (Table 7.14). There are
numerous birds and mammals of conservation interest which utilize the ecoregion. Note that there is
the probability that many more endemic species will be added to this list after comprehensive surveys
that may be conducted by revelant organizations and institutions.
Table 7.14 Critically Endangered and Endangered Species within the Ecoregion
No. Scientific Name Common IUCN Red List Vietnam Class Name
Name Category Redbook
1 Lophura edwardsi Vietnam CR EN Aves

Pheasant
2 Nomascus gabriellae Red-cheeked EN EN Mammalia

Gibbon
3 Megamuntiacus Large- CR VU Mammalia

vuquangensis antlered
Muntjac
4 Muntiacus Annamite DD DD Mammalia

truongsonensis Muntjac
5 Pygathrix nemaeus Red-shanked CR EN Mammalia

Douc Langur
Notes:
CR : Critically Endangered; EN : Endangered; VU : Vulnerable; NT: Near Threatened; DD : Data Deficient; NA : Not Assessed;
LC: Least Concern
7.11.3 World Heritage Areas

World Heritage Areas are areas of outstanding universal value designated by the United Nations
Educational, Scientific and Cultural Organization (UNESCO), as detailed in the following Sections
7.11.3.1 and 7.11.3.2.

7.11.3.1 World Heritage Sites

World Heritage Sites are sites selected by UNESCO having cultural, historic, scientific or other forms
of significance. These areas are legally protected by international treaties and demarcated by UNESCO
as protected zones. This allows for practical conservation of areas which would otherwise be subjected
to threats such as uncontrolled and unrestricted access, and associated activities such as poaching
and illegal logging.
Vietnam has eight registered World Heritage Sites (UNESCO 2019). As none of the World Heritage
Sites overlap with the Study Area and the AoI, World Heritage Sites are not considered relevant for this
assessment.
7.11.3.2 Biosphere Reserves

Biosphere Reserves are areas made up of terrestrial, coastal and marine ecosystems, internationally
recognized under UNESCO’s Man and Biosphere Programme. They are intended to be learning sites
for sustainable development where each reserve encourages sustainable management of interactions
between social and ecological systems (UNESCO 2019).
Vietnam has nine Biosphere Reserves. None of the Biosphere Reserves are within the Study Area, and
the closest Biosphere Reserve is the Cu Lao Cham Biosphere Reserve located approximately 200 km
to the Southeast. As such, Biosphere Reserves are not considered relevant for this assessment.
7.11.4 Ramsar Sites

The Convention of Wetlands, also known as the Ramsar Convention, is an intergovernmental treaty
that provides the framework for the conservation and use of wetlands and their resources (Ramsar
Convention on Wetlands 2019). The Ramsar Convention for Vietnam has been effective from 20
January 1989, and currently has 9 sites designated as Wetlands of International Importance, which
cover an approximate surface area of 120,549 ha (Ramsar Convention on Wetlands 2011). Bau Sau
Wetlands and Seasonal Floodplain, the closest Ramsar site, is 584km to the south of the Project. None
of these sites are within the Study Area, and hence Ramsar sites are not considered relevant for this
assessment.
7.11.5 Key Biodiversity Areas

Key Biodiversity Areas (KBAs) are defined by the Key Biodiversity Areas Partnership 20 as sites that
contribute significantly to the global persistence of biodiversity, applicable to terrestrial, freshwater, and
marine ecosystems. Sites qualify as global KBAs if they meet one or more of 11 criteria as defined by
the Partnership, grouped into the following five categories: threatened biodiversity, geographically
restricted biodiversity, ecological integrity, biological processes and irreplaceability (BirdLife
International 2018). KBAs include Important Bird and Biodiversity Areas (IBA), Alliance for Zero
Extinction (AZE), Important Plant Areas (IPA) and Important Sites for Freshwater Biodiversity. The detail
information of identified IBA is presented in Section 7.11.7.
Based on the IBAT database, six KBAs have been identified within 50km radius from the Project site
(Table 7.15) and a list of species of conservation interest have been identified in these KBAs (Table
7.16).
20
Key Biodiversity Partnership comprises a consortium of 12 conservation NGOs including BirdLife International, IUCN,
Amphibian Survival Alliance, Conservation International, Critical Ecosystem Partnership Fund, Global Environment Facility,
Global Wildlife Conservation, Nature Serve, Rainforest Trust, Royal Society of the Protection of Birds, WWF and Wildlife
Conservation Society.

Table 7.15 List of Key Biodiversity Areas within 50-km Radius from Project Site
Key Biodiversity Distance from

No. Country IBA/ AZE Area (ha)
Area Project Area (km)
1 Laving-Laveun Lao PDR 38,000 45
2 Xe Sap Lao PDR IBA 137,120 45
3 Dong Phou Vieng Lao PDR 299,000 50
4 Truong Son Vietnam IBA 50,000 27
5 Dakrong Vietnam IBA 40,526 18
6 Phong Dien Vietnam IBA 41,548 45

Table 7.16 Species of Conservation Interest in Listed KBAs
IUCN Red List

No. KBAs Scientific names Common names Class name KBA Trigger
Category
Pseudoryx nghetinhensis Saola CR Mammalia Threatened status
Pygathrix nemaeus Red-shanked Douc Langur CR Mammalia Threatened status
Nomascus siki Southern White-cheeked Gibbon EN Mammalia Threatened status
Oriolus traillii Maroon Oriole LC Aves Migratory
Artamus fuscus Ashy Woodswallow LC Aves Migratory
Anthipes monileger White-gorgeted Flycatcher LC Aves Migratory

Laving-Laveun
Machlolophus spilonotus Yellow-cheeked Tit LC Aves Migratory
Ixos mcclellandii Mountain Bulbul LC Aves Migratory
Hypsipetes leucocephalus Black Bulbul LC Aves Migratory
Tesia cyaniventer Grey-bellied Tesia LC Aves Migratory
Phylloscopus poliogenys Grey-cheeked Warbler LC Aves Migratory
Siva cyanouroptera Blue-winged Minla LC Aves Migratory
Xe Sap Lophura nycthemera Silver Pheasant LC Aves Migratory
Oriolus traillii Maroon Oriole LC Aves Migratory
Artamus fuscus Ashy Woodswallow LC Aves Migratory
Hypsipetes leucocephalus Black Bulbul LC Aves Migratory
Siva cyanouroptera Blue-winged Minla LC Aves Migratory
Rheinardia ocellata Crested Argus EN Aves Threatened status
Dong Phou Vieng Panthera tigris Tiger EN Mammalia Threatened status

IUCN Red List

No. KBAs Scientific names Common names Class name KBA Trigger
Category
Elephas maximus Asian Elephant EN Mammalia Threatened status
Indotestudo elongata Yellow-headed Tortoise EN Reptiles Threatened status
Dakrong Pseudoryx nghetinhensis Saola CR Mammalia Threatened status
Dipterocarpus kerrii EN Plant Threatened status
Erythrophleum fordii Gemu EN Plant Threatened status
Aquilaria crassna Eagle Wood CR Plant Threatened status
Lophura edwardsi Vietnam Pheasent CR Aves Migratory
Truong Son Pseudoryx nghetinhensis Saola CR Mammalia Threatened status
Phong Dien Lophura edwardsi Vietnam Pheasent CR Aves Migratory
Pseudoryx nghetinhensis Saola CR Mammalia Threatened status
Panthera tigris Tiger EN Mammalia Threatened status
Dipterocarpus kerrii EN Plant Threatened status
Erythrophleum fordii Gemu EN Plant Threatened status
Aquilaria crassna Eagle Wood CR Plant Threatened status

Notes:
CR : Critically Endangered; EN : Endangered; VU : Vulnerable; NT: Near Threatened; DD : Data Deficient; NA : Not Assessed; LC: Least Concern

Figure 7.22 Key Biodiversity Areas Surrounding Project Area

7.11.6 Protected Areas

According to the IUCN (2008), a Protected Area is “a clearly defined geographical space, recognised,
dedicated and managed, through legal or other effective means, to achieve long-term conservation of
nature with associated ecosystem services and cultural values.” Under the provisions of IFC PS6, a
Protected Area and Internationally Recognized area require specific management actions if
development proceeds within the boundary (see requirements under KBAs outlined above).
Consultation with protected area managers and the community will be required.
7.11.6.1 ASEAN Heritage Parks

ASEAN Heritage Parks (AHPs) are selected protected areas in the ASEAN region recognized for their
unique flora and fauna and ecosystems, wilderness and excellent values (ASEAN Centre for
Biodiversity, 2019). There are no AHPs located within the Study Area. The closest AHP to the Project
Area is the Vu Quang National Park, approximately 220 km to the north. As such, ASEAN Heritage
Parks are not considered relevant for this assessment.
7.11.6.2 Nationally Protected Areas

There are five nationally protected areas situated within the Study Area (Table 7.17). The major threats
to biodiversity at this site are, therefore, habitat loss, hunting and over-exploitation of natural resources.
Table 7.17 Brief Information of Protected Area around the Project Area within 50 km
Radius
No. Protected Area Approximate Summary

Distance from
Project Area
1 Bac Huong Hoa 8km ■ Location: 16°56'21.1"N, 106°35'14.5"E

Nature Reserve
■ Country : Vietnam
■ WDPA ID: 555594125
■ Area size: 234.86 km2
■ Type: Not reported
■ Designation: National
■ Status year : 2012
■ Management Authority: People's Committee of Quang Tri
2 Dakrong Nature 18km ■ Location: 16°36'26.3"N, 106°52'50.8"E
Reserve
■ WDPA ID: 10384
■ Area size: 376.81km2
■ Management Authority: People's Committee of Quang Tri
3 Phong Dien 22km ■ Location: 16°30'13.3"N, 107°15'57.3"E
Nature Reserve

No. Protected Area Approximate Summary

Distance from
Project Area
■ WDPA ID: 303039

■ Management Authority: People's Committee of Thua
Thien Hue
4 Xe Sap 45km ■ Location: 16°21'51.3"N, 106°54'54.3"E

■ Country : Laos
■ WDPA ID: 71261
■ Status year : Note reported
■ Management Authority: Note reported
5 Dong Phou Vieng 50km ■ Location: 16°28'18.6"N, 106°24'29.9"E
National
■ Country : Laos
Biodiversity
Conservation ■ WDPA ID: 312986
Area ■ Area size: 2990.0km2
■ Type: IUCN Category VI
■ Status year : Note reported
■ Management Authority: Not reported

Figure 7.23 Protected Areas Surrounding Project Area

7.11.7 Endemic Bird Areas

An Endemic Bird Area (EBA) is an area to which at least two restricted range bird species (species with
extent of occurrence (EOO) of ≤ 50,000 km 2) are entirely confined (BirdLife International 2020). Vietnam
has a total of seven EBAs.
The Annamese Lowlands EBA21 overlaps with the Project Area. The Annamese Lowlands EBA covers
the lowland and foothills of north-central Vietnam (southern Ninh Binh, Thanh Hoa, Nghe An, Ha Tinh,
Quang Binh, Quang Tri and Thua - Thien Hue province) and part of adjacent central Laos. The natural
vegetation of the EBA is lowland evergreen forest, with smaller areas of limestone forest. However, a
large proportion of the EBA has been deforested, and a majority of the remaining natural vegetation is
highly fragmented. There are 16 Important Bird Areas (IBAs) within the Annamese Lowlands EBA
(Table 7.18 and Figure 7.24).
21
Birdlife International. Available at: http://datazone.birdlife.org/eba/factsheet/139 Accessed: 20 July 2020

Figure 7.24 IBAs in Annamese Lowlands EBA22
22
Birdlife International. Available at: http://datazone.birdlife.org/eba/factsheet/139 Accessed: 20 July 2020

Table 7.18 IBAs within the Annamese Lowlands EBA
No. IBA Code Site Name Country
1 LA026 Khammouan Limestone Laos
2 LA017 Upper Xe Bangfai Laos
3 LA018 Hin Namno Laos
4 LA023 Eastern Bolikhamxay Mountains Laos
5 LA025 Nakai-Nam Theun Laos
6 VN041 Truong Son Vietnam
7 VN019 Ke Go Vietnam
8 VN021 Phong Dien Vietnam
9 VN022 Vu Quang Vietnam
10 VN026 Bach Ma Vietnam
11 VN031 Dakrong Vietnam
12 VN034 Cuc Phong Vietnam
13 VN035 Khe Net Vietnam
14 VN039 Phong Nha Vietnam
15 VN040 Ke Bang Vietnam
16 VN042 Pu Mat Vietnam
Dakrong Important Bird Area is located 15km to the southeast of the Project Area. The IBA which is
40,526ha, is the southern part of the Annamese Lowlands Endemic Bird Area (EBA). The common
habitat in Dakrong IBA is forest and shrubland. Bird species of conservation interest inhabiting Dakrong
proposed nature reserve include Vietnam Pheasant (Lophura edwardsi) [IUCN CR; VNRB EN] and
Imperial Pheasant (Lophura imperialis), Crested argus (Rheinardia ocellata) [IUCN EN].
 In 1996, Vietnam Pheasant (Lophura edwardsi) was rediscovered in Phong My commune, Thua
Thien Hue province, and in Huong Hoa commune, Quang Tri province. In December 1997, at least
four specimens were trapped in Ba Long commune, Quang Tri province. Phong Dien and Dakrong
proposed nature reserves support the known population of Vietnam Pheasant in the world.
 One juvenile male Imperial Pheasant (Lophura imperialis) was captured at Dakrong in February
2000 (Birdlife International. 2020).
 Crested argus (Rheinardia ocellata) is endemic to South-East Asia. The nominate subspecies
occurs along the Annamite mountain chain in central and southern Vietnam and neighbouring
eastern Laos, south to the Da Lat Plateau in southern Vietnam (IUCN Redlist 2020).
Truong Son IBA is 27km away from the Project Area. The IBA which is 50,000ha, is in the northwest
part of the Annamese Lowlands Endemic Bird Area (EBA). Similar to Dakrong IBA, the common habitat
in Truong Son IBA is forest and shrubland. The species of conservation interest in Truong Son IBA is
the Vietnam Pheasant (Rheinardia ocellata) [IUCN EN].
Phong Dien IBA is 45km away from the Project Area which is 41,548ha. According to BirdLife
International, the population of Vietnam Pheasant (Lophura edwardsi) at Phong Dien is considered
relatively common even there is little information related to this species. In addition, Jabouilleia danjoui
[VNRB NT] was recorded that used to occur within Phong Dien and Crested argus (Rheinardia ocellata)
[IUCN EN] is still common within this area (BirdLife International 2020).

Xe Sap IBA is 45km away from the Project Area which is 137,120ha. According to BirdLife International,
the forested mountains within the IBA are important for a number of key bird species, and the large
number of permanent streams are important for Blyth's Kingfisher (Alcedo Hercules) [IUCN NT].
Notably, the IBA is one of only three sites in Laos. This IBA is known to support Yellow-billed
Nuthatch (Sitta solangiae) [IUCN NT] (BirdLife International 2020). In addition, Crested
Argus (Rheinardia ocellata) [IUCN EN] is reported by local people to occur at the IBA (Steinmetz et
al. 1999).
7.11.8 Vietnam Forest Classifications

According to Circular No. 34/2009/TT-BNNPTNT, Vietnam’s forests can be categorized into three
categories based on use purposes, namely special use, production and protection under the Law on
Protection and Development of Forest of the National Assembly:
 Protection forest: Protection forests are used mainly to protect water sources and land, prevent
erosion and desertification, restrict natural calamities and regulate climate, thus contributing to
environmental protection. Protection forest may include (1) headwater protection forests; (2) wind-
and sand-shielding protection forests; (3) protection forests for tide shielding and sea
encroachment prevention; and (4) protection forests for environmental protection.
 Special-use forest: Special-use forests, which are used mainly for conservation of nature,
specimens of the national forest ecosystems and forest biological gene sources; for scientific
research; protection of historical and cultural relics as well as landscapes; in service of recreation
and tourism in combination with protection, contributing to environmental protection. Special-use
forest may include (1) national parks; (2) nature conservation zones; (3) landscape protection
areas; and (4) scientific research and experiment forests.
 Production forest: Production forests are used mainly for production and trading of timber and
non-timber forest products in combination with protection, contributing to environmental protection,
including (1) natural production forests; (2) planted production forests; (3) seeding forests, including
the selected and recognized planted forests and natural forests.
The forest associated with study area is illustrated in Figure 7.25. This forest is under management of
People's Committee of Quang Tri Province. The majority of the Project Area is located in production
forest. A portion of the northern section of the Project Area is classified as protection forest (Figure
7.25). Field surveys at the Project Area determined that the Protection Forest is covered by planted
trees and considered production forest, mainly Acacia spp., banana and cassava (refer to Section
7.11.13.2.1).

Figure 7.25 The Location of Protection Forest (VNForest 2012)

7.11.9 Species of Conservation Interest

The IBAT database was used to identify potential critical habitat species (Critically Endangered,
Endangered species, and Restricted Range species) within the Study Area in order to assess against
the thresholds for Critical Habitat Criterion 1 (Critically endangered, endangered and vulnerable
species), Criterion 2 (Endemic and/or restricted-range species) and Criterion 3 (Migratory and/or
Congregatory species). The complete IBAT risk screen report (dated 10 July 2020) is shown in
Appendix C.
7.11.9.1 Threatened Species

Threatened species are identified as those classified on the IUCN Red List of Threatened Species. The
Red List defines threatened species as those listed as being Critically Endangered (CR), Endangered
(EN) or Vulnerable (VU). CR and EN species are considered to be at a heightened risk of extinction
and have an elevated level of consideration under IFC PS6. These species are candidates for screening
against Critical Habitat Criterion 1. Vulnerable species are also considered under Criterion 1 where the
Project impacts may impact the species to an extent as to warrant the species’ reclassification as either
CR or EN.
Threatened species predicted to occur within the Study Area are listed in Table 7.19.
Table 7.19 Threatened Species Predicted within the Study Area
Category
Red Data
Vietnam
No. Scientific Name Common Name Class Name
Book
IUCN
1 Catlocarpio siamensis Giant Carp CR EN Actinopterygii
2 Pangasius sanitwongsei Giant Pangasius CR NL Actinopterygii
3 Laubuka caeruleostigmata Flying Minnow EN NL Actinopterygii
4 Pangasianodon hypophthalmus Striped Catfish EN NL Actinopterygii
5 Poropuntius deauratus Yellow Tail Brook Barb EN NL Actinopterygii
6 Schistura nudidorsum EN NL Actinopterygii
7 Terateleotris aspro EN NL Actinopterygii
8 Channa maculata LC EN Actinopterygii
9 Calostoma insigne NL EN Agaricomycetes
10 Rhacophorus kio Black-webbed Treefrog LC EN Amphibia
11 Theloderma corticale Tonkin Bug-eyed Frog LC EN Amphibia
12 Calidris pygmaea Spoon-billed Sandpiper CR NL Aves
13 Emberiza aureola Yellow-breasted Bunting CR NL Aves
14 Gyps bengalensis White-rumped Vulture CR CR Aves
15 Gyps tenuirostris Slender-billed Vulture CR DD Aves
16 Lophura edwardsi Vietnam Pheasant CR EN Aves
17 Sarcogyps calvus Red-headed Vulture CR NL Aves
18 Lonchura oryzivora Java Sparrow EN NL Aves

Category
Red Data
Vietnam
Book
IUCN
19 Pavo muticus Green Peafowl EN NL Aves
20 Rheinardia ocellata Crested Argus EN NL Aves
21 Sterna acuticauda Black-bellied Tern EN NL Aves
22 Pelecanus philippensis Spot-billed Pelican NT EN Aves
23 Aquila heliaca Eastern Imperial Eagle VU CR Aves
Mekong Freshwater NL
24 Hemitrygon laosensis EN Chondrichthyes
Stingray
25 Pterocarpus macrocarpus Burma Padauk EN NL Magnoliopsida
26 Manis javanica Sunda Pangolin CR EN Mammalia
27 Manis pentadactyla Chinese Pangolin CR EN Mammalia
28 Muntiacus vuquangensis Large-antlered Muntjac CR NL Mammalia
29 Panthera pardus ssp. delacouri Indochinese Leopard CR NL Mammalia
30 Pseudoryx nghetinhensis Saola CR EN Mammalia
31 Cuon alpinus Dhole EN EN Mammalia
32 Chrotogale owstoni Owston's Civet EN NL Mammalia
33 Elephas maximus Asian Elephant EN CR Mammalia
34 Nesolagus timminsi Annamite Striped Rabbit EN NL Mammalia
35 Nomascus gabriellae Red-cheeked Gibbon EN EN Mammalia
Southern White-cheeked NL
36 Nomascus siki EN Mammalia
Gibbon
37 Panthera tigris Tiger EN NL Mammalia
Red-shanked Douc NL
38 Pygathrix nemaeus CR Mammalia
Langur
39 Trachypithecus germaini Indochinese Lutung EN NL Mammalia
40 Trachypithecus hatinhensis Hatinh Langur EN EN Mammalia
41 Viverra megaspila Large-spotted Civet EN VU Mammalia
Spotted Giant Flying

42 Petaurista elegans LC EN Mammalia
Squirrel
43 Arctictis binturong Binturong VU EN Mammalia
44 Bos gaurus Gaur VU EN Mammalia
45 Helarctos malayanus Sun Bear VU NL Mammalia
46 Lutrogale perspicillata Smooth-coated Otter VU EN Mammalia
47 Panthera pardus Leopard VU CR Mammalia
48 Ursus thibetanus Asiatic Black Bear VU EN Mammalia

Category
Red Data
Vietnam
Book
IUCN
49 Nycticebus pygmaeus Pygmy Slow Loris EN VU Mammalia
50 Crocodylus siamensis Siamese Crocodile CR CR Reptilia
51 Cuora bourreti Bourret's Box Turtle CR NL Reptilia
52 Indotestudo elongata Elongated Tortoise CR EN Reptilia
53 Cuora mouhotii Keeled Box Turtle EN NL Reptilia
Three Horned-scaled NL
54 Protobothrops sieversorum EN Reptilia
Pitviper
55 Python reticulatus Reticulated Python LC CR Reptilia
56 Varanus salvator Common Water Monitor LC EN Reptilia
57 Ophiophagus hannah King Cobra VU CR Reptilia
Notes:
CR : Critically Endangered; EN : Endangered; VU : Vulnerable; NT: Near Threatened; DD : Data Deficient; NA :
Not Assessed; LC: Least Concern; NL : Not Listed
Source: IBAT, 2020
7.11.9.2 Restricted Range Species

According to IFC PS6, restricted range species is defined as species with a limited extent of occurrence
(EOO):
 For terrestrial vertebrates and plants, restricted-range species are defined as those species that
have an EOO less than 50,000 square kilometres (km 2).
 For marine systems, restricted-range species are provisionally being considered those with an
EOO of less than 100,000km2.
 For coastal, riverine, and other aquatic species in habitats that do not exceed 200 km width at any
point (for example, rivers), restricted range is defined as having a global range of less than or equal
to 500 km linear geographic span (i.e., the distance between occupied locations furthest apart).
These species are candidates for screening against Critical Habitat Criterion 2.
There are 13 restricted range species predicted to occur within the Study Area after screening IBAT
(Table 7.20).
Table 7.20 Restricted Range Species Predicted within the Study Area
S/N Scientific Name Common Name Class IUCN Vietnam Estimated

category Redbook EOO (km2)
1 Poropuntius Yellow Tail Brook Actinopterygii EN NL 28,680

deauratus Barb
2 Lophura edwardsi Vietnam Pheasant Aves CR EN 18,000
3 Cussetia Magnoliopsida DD NL 50,000

diversifolia

S/N Scientific Name Common Name Class IUCN Vietnam Estimated

category Redbook EOO (km2)
4 Magnolia Magnoliopsida DD NL 50,000

duperreana
5 Pseudoryx Saola Mammalia CR EN 14,000

nghetinhensis
6 Nesolagus Annamite Striped Mammalia EN NL 44,000

timminsi Rabbit
7 Nomascus siki Southern White- Mammalia EN NL 45,000

cheeked Gibbon
8 Trachypithecus Hatinh Langur Mammalia EN EN 38,000

hatinhensis
9 Nok hualon Bare-faced Bulbul Aves LC NL 34,000
10 Stachyris herberti Sooty Babbler Aves LC VU 28,500
11 Garrulax Chestnut-eared Aves VU NL 19,400

konkakinhensis Laughingthrush
12 Cuora bourreti Bourret's Box Aves CR NL 46,000

Turtle
13 Hipposideros Shield-nosed Leaf- Mammalia VU NL 39,000

scutinares nosed Bat
Notes:
LC: Least Concern; NL : Not Listed
7.11.9.3 Migratory and/or Congregatory Species

Species identified as migratory and/or congregatory within the Study Area using the relevant BirdLife
International database and IUCN species profiles are also listed in order to assess against the
thresholds for critical habitat Criterion 3 (Migratory and/or congregatory species). There are 246
migratory species and 12 congregatory species that were predicted as candidates, as shown in
Appendix D.
7.11.9.4 Species identified Literature Review

Flora: A systematic review of literature sources revealed no relevant information on flora diversity of
the Huong Tan commune. However, there were various publications on flora diversity of the Bac Huong
Hoa Nature Reserve and Quang Tri province. (Mahood and Tran 2008) studied plant diversity at Bac
Huong Hoa Natural Reserve and reported 25 threatened species both at national and global scale
(Table 7.21). (Xuyen, et al. 2016.) recorded 129 species of ferns and fern allies. In addition, various
plant species new-to-science have been recently described in the Bac Huong Hoa-Dakrong corridor,
as mentioned in (Xuyen, et al. 2016.), (Xu, et al. 2018) and (Cai, et al. 2020).
Table 7.21 Threatened Plant Species at Bac Huong Hoa Natural Reserve as Reported by
Mahood, S. P. and Tran Van Hung (2008)
Vietnam Red Data book

ID Scientific name IUCN Red List (2020)
(2007)
1 Amoora dasyclada NL VU

Vietnam Red Data book

ID Scientific name IUCN Red List (2020)
(2007)
2 Anoectochilus cetaceus NL EN
3 Aquilaria crassna CR EN
4 Ardisia silvestris NL VU
5 Asarum balansae NL EN
6 Cephalotaxus manii VU VU
7 Chukrasia tabularis NL VU
8 Cinnamomum balansae EN VU
9 Cinnamomum parthenoxylon DD CR
10 Cirsium japonicum NL VU
11 Coscinium fenestratum NL VU
12 Croton touranensis VU VU
13 Dendrobium amabile NL EN
14 Dendrobium farmeri NL VU
15 Dipterocarpus grandiflorus NL VU
16 Dipterocarpus hasseltii CR CR
17 Dipterocarpus kerrii NL CR
18 Erythrophleum fordii NL EN
19 Fagerlindia depauperata NL VU
20 Lithocarpus fenestratus NL VU
21 Lithocarpus haemispherica NL VU
22 Madhuca pasquieri NL EN
23 Melientha suavis NL VU
24 Paramichelia baillonii NL VU
25 Strychnos ignatii NL VU
Notes:
LC: Least Concern; NL = Not Listed
Non-volant mammalian fauna: there have been various studies on the non-volant mammals of Huong
Hoa-Dakrong area, such as (Dang, Can and Nghia 2007) ; (D. N. Manh ND 2009); (Trung, et al. 2013).
According to (NT, et al. 2013), there are 33 records of species of conservation interest in Huong Hoa
Nature Reserve, which includes:
 Red-shanked Douc Langur (Pygatthrix nemaeus) [IUCN CR;
 Northern White-cheeked Gbibon (Nomascus leucogenys) [IUCN CR]; and
 Sao La (Pseudoryx nghetinhensis) [IUCN CR, VNRB EN].
Remarkably, the Sao La is believed to occur in both Bac Huong Hoa Nature Reserve (Thai et al. 2013)
and Dakrong Nature Reserve (D. N. Manh ND 2009). Many endangered large mammals such as Large-
antlered Muntjac (Muntiacus vuquangensis) [IUCN CR] and the Annamite Muntjac (Mutiacus
truongsonensis) [IUCN DD, VNRB DD] are believed to occur in the region. The primate diversity in both

Bac Huong Hoa and Dakrong Nature Reserve is considered significant. There are eight (8) records of
primate species (three (3) families) that were found in the Bac Huong Hoa- Dakrong condor (Thanh,
Hai DT and Tuan NN 2018). Of these species, eight (8) are listed as species of conservation interest
(lowest ranking was VU) by the IUCN Red List (2020). The Red-shanked Douc Langur and Northern
White-cheeked Gibbon are both listed as CR species in IUCN Red List and have been targeted by
multiple conservation campaigns (Mittermeier 2010); (Nadler 2010); (Rawson, et al. 2011).
Bat fauna: (Dang, et al. 2008); (Kuskop SV 2013); (Manh ND, Dang NX and Nghia NX 2009); Ngo Kim
Thai et al, 2013; (Vuong 2013) has indicated that almost nothing is known about bat diversity in the
protected areas surrounding the Project Area, whereas bat records in Bac Huong Hoa and Dakrong
Nature Reserves consist of at least 55 bat species. Among these records, 6 species are currently
considered nationally threatened based on Vietnam Red Data Book (MOST, 2007). Of the species only
the Shield-nosed Leaf-nosed Bat (Hipposideros scutinares) is considered threatened (Vulnerable) in
accordance with the IUCN Red List (IUCN, 2020) as it is only known from a few locations within the
Annamite Range, the population is small and projected to decline at a rate of 10% over the next 15
years (Furey, et al. 2019). In addition, two species have been categorised as “DD - data deficient" in
the IUCN Red List (IUCN, 2020) as little or no information is available on their abundance and
distribution. While four (4) other species have not yet having been assessed by the IUCN as they were
either recently described or are being re-evaluated by their species rank.
Avian fauna: the Project is about 18 km west from Dakrong Nature Reserve, which is recognized
internationally as an IBA (Tordoff 2002); (Birdlife International. 2020) (Tordoff 2002; Birdlife International
2020). According to Birdlife International (2020), Dakrong Nature Reserve is a part of the Annamese
Lowlands EBA that shelters various endemic bird species such as the Vietnam Pheasant (Lophura
edwardsi) [IUCN CR]. (Trai, et al. 2005) recorded 217 bird species of 48 families, 16 orders in Dakrong
Nature Reserve. Many of the bird species can cover the 18 km distance from the Project Area to
Dakrong Nature Reserve with ease. Birds may also migrate short distances between the Dakrong
Nature Reserve and the Bac Huong Hoa Nature Reserve, thus passing through the Project Area.
Herpetofauna: A few herpetofauna studies had been conducted in the surrounding areas. According
to the latest paper of ‘herpetofauna in the North Central Vietnam’, a Vietnamese document (Hoang
Ngoc Thao et al., 2020) and in the ‘A collection of amphibians and reptiles from Bac Huong Hoa Nature
Reserve’ (Nguyen, et al. 2016), 36 amphibian species and 77 reptilian species were recorded in the
Quang Tri province. At least one (1) species that was new-to-science has been described at the Bac
Huong Hoa Nature Reserve (Orlov and Ho 2005). According to Nguyen et al. (2016), the Impressed
Tortoise (Manouria impressa) [IUCN VU] and the Big-headed Turtle (Platysternon megacephalum)
[IUCN EN] should be the priority for herpetofauna conservation in Bac Huong Hoa area.
7.11.9.5 Species Identified from Desktop

Species of conservation interest were also identified using other datasets to diversify the source of
information. Specifically, three reliable biodiversity databases were used to obtain information regarding
the potential occurrences of conservation species including:
 Occurrence database of the Global Biodiversity Information Facility (available at:
https://www.gbif.org/);
 Occurrence database of the Cornell Lab of Ornithology (https://ebird.org/); and
 Occurrence database of the California Academy of Sciences (https://www.inaturalist.org/)
According to GBIF database, there are 166 bird species and 10 bat species recorded within the Study
Area (see Appendix E). Of these species, there are 31 species of conservation interest including five
(5) avian fauna species, one (1) fish species, 18 flora species and seven (7) mammal species (Table
7.22).

For eBird database, there are 214 avian fauna records within the Study Area (see Appendix F). Of these
records, there is only one (1) conservation interest, which was the Crested Argus (Rheinardia Ocellata)
[IUCN EN].
In addition, the iNaturalist provides the presence of Red-shanked Douc Langur (Pygathrix nemaeus)
[IUCN CR] in Dong Ha, which is approximately 45km from the Project Area.
Table 7.22 Species of Conservation Interest Base on GBIF Database
No. Class Scientific Name Common name IUCN Vietnam Red

Data Book
1 Aves Urocissa whiteheadi Hainan Magpie EN NL
2 Aves Rheinardia ocellata Crested Argus EN NL
3 Aves Chloropsis cochinchinensis Javan Leafbird EN NL
4 Aves Lophura edwardsi Vietnam Pheasant CR EN
5 Aves Pavo muticus Green- Peafowl EN NL
6 Flora Madhuca pasquieri VU EN
7 Flora Fernandoa adenophylla NL VU
8 Flora Pterocarpus macrocarpus Burma Padauk EN EN
9 Flora Knema mixta VU NL
10 Flora Calamus poilanei NL EN
11 Flora Oryza rufipogon Wild Rice LC VU
12 Flora Magnolia rufibarbata EN NL
13 Flora Ixodonerium annamense NL VU
14 Flora Castanopsis ferox NL VU
15 Flora Lithocarpus fenestratus LC VU
16 Flora Lithocarpus vestitus NL EN
17 Flora Castanopsis lecomtei NL VU
18 Flora Castanopsis hystrix NL VU
19 Flora Murraya glabra NL VU
20 Flora Musa coccinea Okinawa Torch EN NL
21 Flora Cinnamomum Martaban Camphor Wood LC CR

parthenoxylon
22 Flora Horsfieldia longiflora VU NL
23 Mammalia Hipposideros scutinares Shield-nosed Leaf-nosed Bat VU NL
24 Mammalia Rhinolophus thomasi Thomas's Horseshoe Bat LC VU
25 Mammalia Pseudoryx nghetinhensis Saola CR EN
26 Mammalia Nycticebus coucang Slow Loris EN NL
27 Mammalia Trachypithecus cristatus Silvered Langur VU NL
28 Mammalia Manis pentadactyla Chinese Pangolin CR EN

No. Class Scientific Name Common name IUCN Vietnam Red

Data Book
29 Mammalia Tragulus javanicus Java Mousedeer DD VU
Notes:
CR : Critically Endangered; EN : Endangered; VU : Vulnerable; NT: Near Threatened; DD : Data Deficient; NA :
Not Assessed; LC: Least Concern; NL = Not Listed
7.11.10 Invasive Species

Invasive species are non-native species to a particular ecosystem and whose introduction and spread
causes, or are likely to cause, socio-cultural, economic, environmental harm or harm to human health.
These species become naturalized in their introduced range, and often reproduce in large numbers and
spread over a large area. This can result in competition and damage to native species.
Invasive species have the capacity to exacerbate their role in ecosystem degradation through a
combination of threats from habitat change, climate change over-exploitation of ecosystem resources
and pollution. These further enhance their threat to biodiversity and human health.
According to the Global Invasive Species Database 23, Vietnam is home to 131 invasive species, of
which 102 are terrestrial species and 29 are aquatic species (freshwater and marine). The list of invasive
species in Vietnam are shown in Appendix G. The invasive species recorded during field surveys are
listed in Section 7.11.13.2.1.
7.11.11 Ecologically Appropriate Area for Analysis

In accordance with IFC PS6 an Ecologically Appropriate Area for Analysis (EAAA) for analysis should
be identified to determine the presence of critical habitat for each species. This is the area of analysis
to assess the applicability of the critical habitat criteria and thresholds. PS6 notes when defining the
boundaries the following aspects should be considered: distribution of the species or ecosystems,
ecological patterns, processes, features, and functions that are necessary for maintaining them.
The EAAA contains three key ecosystem which is renowned as the terrestrial environment. The majority
of candidate species aligned with ecosystems within EAAAs have been defined for this assessment
(Table 7.23).
The EAAA was defined based on the existing Project Area, the surrounding environmental condition,
surrounding land uses, likely species of conservation interest present (particularly migratory birds,
mammals and terrestrial reptiles), main habitat types for critical habitat candidate species, natural
barriers and existing anthropogenic impacts. The EAAA possesses a range of land class types including
bare land, vegetation, surface water, agricultural land and built-up which are scattered throughout the
area. The EAAA covers approximately 853 ha (Figure 7.26). The identified candidate species groups,
main habitat types associated with these species, and type of EAAA that these habitat types have been
included in, are outlined below in Table 7.23.
Table 7.23 Candidate Species Habitat Requirements and EAAA
No. Identified candidate species EAAA Comment on inclusion/exclusion of

groups habitat type
1 Migratory birds; resident birds, Vegetation/ The area within the EAAA contains tall
forest dwelling herpetofauna and Plantation plantation such as Acacia, which could be
mammals, flora used by candidate species assessed.
23
GISD, 2019. Available at: http://www.iucngisd.org/gisd/. Accessed: 01 April 2020

No. Identified candidate species EAAA Comment on inclusion/exclusion of

groups habitat type
2 Migratory birds; resident birds Agricultural and The area within the EAAA contains cleared
bare land and cultivated areas, which may be used by
candidate species assessed.
3 Fishes Surface water The area within the EAAA contains lakes and
streams, which could be used by candidate
species assessed.

Figure 7.26 Ecologically Appropriate Area for Analysis of the Project

7.11.12 Natural Habitat and Modified Habitat
7.11.12.1 Land Classification

Landsat 8 satellite image with resolution 30m per pixel was used to calculate the normalised differential
vegetation index (NDVI) of the Study Area, which was subsequently used to determine the vegetation
cover. Calculated NDVI resulted in a raster output with each pixel assigned a value from -1 to 1, where
values within -1 to 0 range are unlikely vegetation cover, and values within 0 to 1 represent vegetation
cover. The healthier vegetation cover is, the thicker canopy it has. Thicker canopy will have higher NDVI
value. The calculated NDVI within the Project Area and its proximity is illustrated in Figure 7.27.
The result of land classification is presented in Figure 7.28.

Figure 7.27 Vegetation Class in Proximity to Project Area

Figure 7.28 Land Classification within Study Area

Vegetation classes derived from the Study Area are described below with satellite imagery and
photographs, and are shown in Figure 7.29-Figure 7.33. All satellite imagery were obtained from Google
Earth.
 Bare land: Bare land are areas with no dominant vegetation cover on at least 90% of the area or
areas covered by lichens/moss. The presence of bare land within the area is predominantly due to
the land clearance for the purpose of agriculture. Bare land is considered modified habitat.
Figure 7.29 Satellite Imagery of Bare Land

 Vegetation:
- Vegetation refers to the forest, a large area of land covered with trees and other plants.
According to the Vietnam regulation, the forest is classified into three categories including
production forest, special-use forest, and protection forest. The special-use and protection
forest are considered natural habitat.
- The protection forest within the EAAA is planted forest such as pines, cajuput, and is
considered as modified habitat.
- The production forest within the EAAA is planted forest, including forests planted with state
budget funds and forests planted with forest owners’ investment funds (their own funds, loans,
joint venture or association funds not originating from the state budget) or with the State’s
support and funds from other sources which will be categorised as modified habitat. The
production forest within the EAAA was confirmed planted production forest and was classified
as modified habitat.

Figure 7.30 Satellite Imagery of Vegetation

 Surface water: Surface water generally refers to rivers and water bodies. Species of conservation
interest may include aquatic bird as open-water areas and large concentrations of aquatic stocks
are natural attractants to many birds. The lake is utilized by humans but still maintains important
ecological services, thus this area is considered natural habitat.
Figure 7.31 Satellite Imagery of Surface Water

 Agricultural Land: Agriculture refers to agricultural land and annual crop land. This area is
considered modified habitat.

Figure 7.32 Satellite Imagery of Agriculture Land

 Non-vegetated land (built-up): Non-vegetated land refers to urban and built-up land that is generally
void of vegetation. No species of conservation interest are likely to occur in this land class. This
area is considered modified habitat.
Figure 7.33 Satellite Imagery of Non-Vegetated Land
7.11.12.2 Natural/Modified Habitat Assessment

According to ADB SPS, the definition of Natural Habitat, Modified Habitat and Critical Habitat are
presented as below:

Natural Habitat These are land and water areas where the biological communities are
formed largely by native plant and animal species, and were human activity
has not essentially modified the area’s primary ecological functions.
In areas of natural habitat, the project will not significantly convert or degrade
such habitat, unless the following conditions are met:
■ No alternatives are available;
■ A comprehensive analysis demonstrates that the overall benefits from
the project will substantially outweigh the project costs, including
environmental costs;
■ Any conversion or degradation is appropriately mitigated.
Mitigation measures will be designed to achieve at least no net loss of
biodiversity. They may include a combination of actions, such as post-project
restoration of habitats, offset of losses through the creation or effective
conservation of ecologically comparable areas that are managed for
biodiversity while respecting the ongoing use of such biodiversity by
Indigenous Peoples or traditional communities, and compensation to direct
users of biodiversity.
Modified Habitat These areas are characterised by an environment that has been altered by
human activity, and its population of native species reduced.
In areas of modified habitat, where the natural habitat has apparently been
altered, often through the introduction of alien species of plants and animals,
such as in agricultural areas, the borrower/client will exercise care to
minimize any further conversion or degradation of such habitat, and will,
depending on the nature and scale of the project, identify opportunities to
enhance habitat and protect and conserve biodiversity as part of project
operations.
Critical Habitat It is an area of high biodiversity value, which includes habitat supporting
critically endangered or endangered species; having special significance for
endemic or restricted-range species; sites supporting migratory species;
areas supporting globally significant concentrations of individuals of
congregatory species; areas with unique assemblages of species associated
with key evolutionary processes or providing key ecosystem services; and
areas with biodiversity of significant social, economic, or cultural importance
to local communities.
No project activity will be implemented in areas of critical habitat unless the
following requirements are met:
■ There are no measurable adverse impacts, or likelihood of such, on the
critical habitat which could impair its high biodiversity value or the ability
to function.
■ The project is not anticipated to lead to a reduction in the population of
any recognized endangered or critically endangered species or a loss in
area of the habitat concerned such that the persistence of a viable and
representative host ecosystem be compromised.
■ Any lesser impacts are mitigated in accordance with the requirement of
mitigation measure mentioned above for natural habitat
There is currently no methodology within ADB SPS, IFC PS6 and the associated Guidance Note (GN)
on the approach to assess the distribution of these habitat types. ERM has utilised methods used

previously in consultation with the IFC to complete this assessment using remote sensing techniques
for the Study Area. The vegetation class assessment above, remote sensing and management plan
have been used to define these areas.
The modified habitat dominates the study area, account for 99.68% and 100% within EAAA and Project
Area respectively (Table 7.24).
Table 7.24 Natural and Modified Habitat Areas within the Study Area
Habitat Type EAAA (ha) Project Area (ha)
Area (ha) Percent (%) Area (ha) Percent (%) Area (ha)
Natural Habitat 2.74 0.32% 0 0%
Modified Habitat 851.9 99.68% 26.04 100%
Total 854.64 100% 26.04 100%
Figure 7.34 shows the natural and modified habitat areas. Natural habitats within the EAAA consist of
freshwater account for 0.32% while modified habitats comprise bare land, agricultural land, and
vegetation. The vegetation occupies the largest percentage within the EAAA accounting for 75.08%,
followed by bare land (17.94%), agricultural land (6.54%), built-up areas (0.12%).
Table 7.25 Habitats and Area within EAAA
Habitat Type Natural/ Modified EAAA

Habitat
Area (ha) Percent (%)
Bare Land Modified 153.31 17.94
Agricultural Land Modified 55.87 6.54
Vegetation/ Plantation Modified 641.69 75.08
Built-up Modified 1.03 0.12
Freshwater Natural 2.74 0.32
Total 854.64 100
The total area of the Project Footprint is approximately 26.04 ha, which is 100% area modified habitat
(Table 7.26).
Table 7.26 Habitats and Area within Project Footprint
S/N Habitat Type Total Area Habitat Type (ha)

(ha)
Bareland Agricultural Land Bare land
(Production (Production (Protection Forest)
Forest) Forest)
I Fixed-term Land Use 11.64 4.5 7.102 0.038
1 Turbine foundations 1.8 1.2 0.6 -
2 Transmission line 35KV and 0.6 - 0.562 0.03824

63 TL towers
24
There are five 35kV tower footings insider the protection forest area

S/N Habitat Type Total Area Habitat Type (ha)

(ha)
Bareland Agricultural Land Bare land
(Production (Production (Protection Forest)
Forest) Forest)
3 Internal roads (including 9.24 3.3 5.94

available access road and -
extended area)
II Temporary Land Use 14.4 10.5 3.9 -
1 Laydown area and Crane 14.4 10.5 3.9 -

installation area
Total acquired land (I+II) 26.04 15.0 11.002 0.038
Natural Habitat 0 0 0 0
Modified Habitat 26.04 15.0 11.002 0.038

Figure 7.34 Natural and Modified Habitat Areas within Study Area

7.11.13 Biodiversity Field Surveys

ERM contracted biodiversity specialists to undertake biodiversity surveys of the Project Area and
surrounds. Biodiversity survey reports are provided in Appendix H and Appendix T.
7.11.13.1 Field Survey Program

Multidisciplinary biodiversity field surveys were undertaken within the Project Area and surroundings. A
summary of the survey activities is provided in Table 7.27.

Table 7.27 Field Surveys Undertaken within the Study Area
Survey Date Survey Survey Methods Survey Effort

Technique
Flora First Survey (14th- Line Transect Line transect surveys occurred along roads (10 m buffer) The length of line transect is estimated at
15th May 2020) Survey connecting to each designed wind-turbine. Plants with flowers or approximately 5km.
fruits or with both were collected, photographed, pressed, dried
and deposited in field herbarium. Common plant species were
not collected but identified in the field. The specimens were
identified by morphology and based mainly on an illustrated flora
of Vietnam (Pham Hoang, 1999), floras of adjacent area,
monographs, type specimens and protologues.
Vegetation Results from the line transect survey were used as ground truth 11 reference points were used. The reference
type mapping data for the remote sensing analysis. Additionally, Google aerial points along with the transect survey and the
imagery, Esri aerial imagery are utilized to identify by observation from Stateline.
visualization with software QGIS version 3.12.
16.626237°, 106.688142°
16.626507°, 106.684797°
16.623507°, 106.687902°
16.616895°, 106.685346°
16.627646°, 106.698009°
16.613851°, 106.696842°
16.619955°, 106.686546°
16.641601°, 106.679351°
16.639480°, 106.696695°
16.634446°, 106.691253°
16.621563°, 106.684174°


Technique
Avifauna First Survey (13th- Vantage Point At each point, one experienced bird observer equipped with 2 vantage point surveys occurred in a 7-day
(Bird) 21st May 2020) Survey25 binoculars and a camera with long tele lens (Nikon D4 with lens period, 36 hours and 39 hours totally in first and
400mm F2.8 and TC 2X) would be stationed and actively scan second survey respectively . Two VPs (VP1:
Second Survey (4th - the whole area within a 2km radius from the vantage point for (16.62879° N; 106.70275° E); and VP2:
8th Octorber and 10th avifauna’s activity (16.61791° N; 106.68056° E)). Survey time:
November 2020) 06:00-11:00 and 14:00-18:00
First Survey (13th- Transect The observers moved slowly along transects by walking and Survey times were from 06:00-10:00 and then
21st May 2020) Survey using binoculars to detect bird species, and counted the number 15:00-18:00 as these are the most active times
of individuals present. Identifiable vocalizations were also for birds. Total length of transect is 8.9 km where
Second Survey (30th counted as records. GPS positions, photographs (where the surveys had been conducted repeatedly.
September, 1st Oct, possible), distance and compass bearing of the sighted animals
4th Oct, 10th Nov, were recorded. All observers undertaking the surveys are highly
11th Nov 2020)26 skilled at identifying all taxa in the region by direct observation or
their species-specific vocalizations. Observations were checked
against field guides including but not limited to Field Guide to the
Birds of Southeast Asian
Bat First Survey (13th - Acoustic Six stationary acoustic monitoring stations were deployed in Each Echo Meter Touch and SM4Bat FS was set
15th May 2020) monitoring strategic points inside the area. At each station, a high-sensitive to automatically start recording at 17:30 and stop
station recording system, the hand-held Echo Meter Touch and SM4Bat recording at 7:30 next day. Each station was
Second Survey (19th-
FS was deployed to record bat acoustic signals between sunset surveyed for one night with 11.5 hours per
21th September
(local time 17:30) and sunrise (local time 7:30). station in first and second survey. Total of 138-
2020)26
hour survey were conducted in six stations.
Represented as number of bat passes/registered
per hour.
Mist-net/ Harp A series of mist-nets with 360m2mnh mesh size and harp trap of Mist –nets and harp traps were set up in three
trap 86.4m2mnh were set up in strategic points inside the Project locations. There were 2160 m2-mist-net-hours
25
Scottish Natural Heritage. 2014. Recommended bird survey methods to inform impact assessment of onshore wind farms:1–37.
26
The second surveys were carried out in two separated period times due to the typhoons occurred in the Central Vietnam


Technique
Area to collect bat samples. The use of harptraps (1.8mx2.0m) (mnh) of mist-nest and 518.4 m2- harp-trap-hours
was effective only at certain sites where retain some patches of (hth) of harp trap. Survey time for mist-net is
scrubs; while mist-nets were suitable for capturing fruit eating 17:30-07:30 next day while survey time for harp
and open-space foraging bats and were set at ground level (up trap is 18:00-05:30 next day.
to 6 m high
Non-volant First Survey (17th- Line Transect Surveyors followed transects, spotted and identified all The survey was conducted in both daytime (4:00
mammal 18th May 2020) Survey encountered wild animals. The opportunistic observations were to 12:00) and night-time (16:30 to 23:00) to
taken both in day and night time in order to fit with different record both diurnal and nocturnal animals.
active time of different group of mammals, for example, primates
Total transect 9.54 km.
are mainly active at daytime while small carnivores are often
active at night time. GPS positions, photographs (where Total survey hours: 12 hours
possible), distance and compass bearing to the sighted animals
Each transect was survey one time.
were recorded for further analysis.
Rapid survey The interview was followed semi-structure interview protocol, Three interviewers would approach six local
interview with customized questionnaire that have both close and open peoples. Both responders are farmers.
questions. Image catalogue was shown to local people to check
their final confirmation.
Herpetofauna First Survey (14th - Line Transect Diurnal survey was carried out along main road where turbines Total transect 6.77 km.
15th May 2020) Survey proposed to build, small trails from the main road that across
Total survey hours: 14,5 hours
different habitats (planted Acacia forests, coffee farm and rice
fields), and along water reservoirs. Nocturnal survey was along Each transect was survey one time.
rice fields and small streams surrounding.
Rapid survey The interview was followed semi-structure interview protocol, Two interviewers would approach two
interview with customized questionnaire that have both close and open responders. Both responders are farmers.
questions. Image catalogue was shown to local people to check
their final confirmation.

7.11.13.2 Terrestrial Biodiversity
7.11.13.2.1 Terrestrial Flora
7.11.13.2.1.1 Line Transect Survey

Available roads are utilised and line transects are designed to cover all kinds habitat. Line transects
that are located along access roads close to proposed WTGs were selected for flora survey. At each
transect, plants occurring in the areas within 10 m along both sides of the roads. Estimated about total
length of 5km transects were carried out, which divided into two areas following the turbine-
concentration, area 1 (Lien Lap 1) covered WT01 to WT06 and the Met mast while area 2 (Lien Lap 2)
covered TB07 to TB12. The effort of line transect is presented in Figure 7.35.
Figure 7.35 Location of Line Transect Survey

A total of 39 taxa (mostly identified to species) from 27 families were recorded. The most common
families were Asteraceae, Rubiaceae and Euphorbiaceae (four species). The survey area was divided
into two areas, named Lien Lap 1 and Lien Lap 2.
Lien Lap 1
The vegetation at Lien Lap 1 was predominately comprised of plantations of Acacia hybrid, coffee, tea,
banana and Trẩu Vernicia montana. The understory in coffee and tea plantation was composed of a
dense layer of invasive species as Xuyến chi Bidens pilosa, Cỏ cứt heo Ageratum conyzoides, Cỏ lào
Chromolaena odorata, a few bushes of Sục sạc Crotalaria spp. and Pennisetum polystachion.
Additionally, the understory along the transects was dominated by Pteridophyte as Ráng Tây Sơn thẳng
Dicranopteris linearis, Thạch tùng Lycopodiella cernua, An điền leo Hedyotis scandens, Đót
Thysanolaena latifolia and Blumea balsamifera. Several moss and lichen species were recorded in the
ground layer such as Pottiaceae and Cladonia sp. Small tree and shrubs species of Asteraceae,
Malvaceae, Melastomaceae, Primulaceae, Rubiaceae and vine species such as Convolvulaceae,

Fabaceae, Menispermaceae, Rosaceae were recorded. Medium trees (7–10 m) generally from the
family Altingiaceae, Apocynaceae, Euphorbiaceae, Fabaceae, Hyperiaceae, Lecythidaceae were
recorded. The biggest tree (Ficus sp.) in Lien Lap 1 had a height of 20 m. An invasive species recorded
in this area was Mai dương (Mimosa pigra). The Mimosa pigra was recorded next to a big stream and
pond. The number of invasive species here was high which can be explained by the marginal effect.
specifically by human activities and transportation that contribute to the proliferation of invasive species
along the roads.
Two individuals of Burma Padauk (Pterocarpus macrocarpus) [IUCN EN] were recorded next to the
road within Lien Lap 1. These individuals appeared to be in a healthy condition.
Lien Lap 2
The vegetation at Lien Lap 2 was different from Lien Lap 1 due to changes in topography (steep slopes
with significant soil erosion in Lien Lap 2). The plantations in this area was dominated by Acacia hybrids,
banana and cassava with the understory dominated by Hồng nhung Melinis repens, Ageratum
conyzoides, Fabaceae vine, Convolvulaceae vine. Small tree, bush and shrub species were sparse and
usually found as species of Meliaceae, Poaceae, Rubiaceae. A few individuals of Eurycoma longifolia
(ethnological significance - medical) were recorded in Lien Lap 2. Medium trees within Lien Lap 2 were
generally species of Fabaceae, Lamiaceae, Lauraceae and Meliaceae.
Invasive species were recorded, which included Mimosa pudica, Pennisetum polystachion, Melinis
repens, and hence the construction through this area should also be made under invasive species
management.
Table 7.28 List of Identified Flora Species in Listed IUCN Red List
ID Vietnamese name Scientific name Family IUCN Red VNRB

List
1 Từ bi xanh, Đại bi, Băng phiến Blumea balsamifera Asteraceae LC NL
2 Sâu trắng, Bạch giao, Trao, Sau Liquidambar formosana Altingiaceae LC NL

sau
3 Giáng Hương trái to (Burma Pterocarpus macrocarpus Fabaceae EN EN

Padauk)
Notes:
LC: Least Concern
7.11.13.2.1.2 Vegetation Type Mapping

Five vegetation types (Figure 7.36) were recognized from transect surveys in Project Area:
 Acacia: The plantation of “Acacia hybrid”, an introduced species from Australia which is considered
as reforestation. Acacia here was new planting, estimated about 2 years to 5 years, it occupied
27% of the Project Area.
 Mixed plantation: Banana, coffee and tea plantation associates with Trau Vernicia montana, Sau
sau Liquidambar formosana, Ageratum conyzoides, Bidens pilosa and Chromolaena odorata was
the most dominant land in Lien Lap project which occupied over 70%.
 Paddy rice: Some small piece of land at lower elevation along stream were used as paddy rice
fields.
 Wetland: A few areas were identified as wetland including fishponds,damp and streams, these are
manmade wetlands which do not have high value of biodiversity.
 Non-vegetated land: Eroded land and cleared areas were identified as non-vegetated land.

In general, the Project Area was mainly private lands covered by mixed plantation dominated coffee
and tea.
Figure 7.36 Vegetation Types of Project Area
7.11.13.2.1.3 Invasive Species

The flora survey recorded eight invasive species within the Project Area (Table 7.29).
Table 7.29 List of Plant Invasive
ID Vietnamese name Scientific name Family IUCN Red List VNR

B
1 Thượng lảo, Tai hùm Erigeron canadensis Asteraceae NL NL
2 Cỏ lào Chromolaena odorata Asteraceae NE NL
3 Đuôi voi nhiều gié, Cỏ Mỹ Pennisetum polystachion Poaceae NL NL
4 Hồng nhung, hồng nhan bạc Melinis repen Poaceae NL NL

phận
5 Cỏ cứt heo Ageratum conyzoides Asteraceae NL NL
6 Xuyến chi, Song nha Bidens pilosa Asteraceae NL NL
7 Mai dương Mimosa pigra Fabaceae LC NL
8 Mắc cỡ, trinh nữ Mimosa pudica Fabaceae NL NL

Notes:
CR : Critically Endangered; EN : Endangered; VU : Vulnerable; NT: Near Threatened; DD : Data Deficient; NE : Not Evaluated;
LC: Least Concern; NL: Not Listed

7.11.13.2.2 Avifauna (Birds)
7.11.13.2.2.1 Transect Survey

Species composition was compiled from 32 mackinnon-lists, of which 21 lists were collected in first
survey and 11 were collected in second survey. Total 55 bird species were recorded, 46 species were
detected during first survey and 30 species were dectected during second survey. All recorded species
are considered as common in the region, none of them are listed threatened category in IUCN red list
nor Vietnam Red Data Book. Table 7.30 bellow shows detail records of each species including relative
species (RSA) is its frequency of occurrence throughout 32 mackinnon-lists in percentage and detected
times (DT) reflex to number of times that species was observed/heard during surveys.
Table 7.30 List of Bird Species Recorded along the Terrestrial Transects
No. Scientific name English name IUCN First Survey Second Both survey
Survey
RSA DT RSA DT RSA DT
1 Pycnonotus Sooty-headed LC 57.14% 12 63.64% 7 59.38% 19

aurigaster Bulbul
2 Apus nipalensis House Swift LC 52.38% 11 63.64% 7 56.25% 18
3 Lanius schach Long-tailed LC 42.86% 9 54.55% 6 46.88% 15

Shrike
4 Spilopelia Eastern Spotted LC 28.57% 6 45.45% 5 34.38% 11

chinensis Dove
5 Centropus Greater Coucal LC 23.81% 5 54.55% 6 34.38% 11

sinensis
6 Eudynamys Western Koel LC 52.38% 11 0.00% 0 34.38% 11

scolopaceus
7 Dicrurus Hair-crested LC 28.57% 6 36.36% 4 31.25% 10

hottentottus Drongo
8 Garrulax White-crested LC 28.57% 6 36.36% 4 31.25% 10

leucolophus Laughingthrush
9 Gracupica Black-collared LC 14.29% 3 63.64% 7 31.25% 10

nigricollis Starling
10 Cuculus Indian Cuckoo LC 42.86% 9 0.00% 0 28.13% 9

micropterus
11 Acridotheres Common Myna LC 9.52% 2 45.45% 5 21.88% 7

tristis
12 Cypsiurus Asian Palm- LC 28.57% 6 0.00% 0 18.75% 6

balasiensis swift
13 Psilopogon Lineated Barbet LC 14.29% 3 27.27% 3 18.75% 6

lineatus

Survey
14 Psilopogon Moustached LC 28.57% 6 0.00% 0 18.75% 6

incognitus Barbet
15 Artamus fuscus Ashy LC 19.05% 4 18.18% 2 18.75% 6

Woodswallow
16 Orthotomus Dark-necked LC 19.05% 4 18.18% 2 18.75% 6

atrogularis Tailorbird
17 Ardeola bacchus Chinese Pond- LC 23.81% 5 0.00% 0 15.63% 5

heron
18 Coracina Large LC 23.81% 5 0.00% 0 15.63% 5

javensis Cuckooshrike
19 Dicrurus Black Drongo LC 19.05% 4 9.09% 1 15.63% 5

macrocercus
20 Dicrurus Ashy Drongo LC 19.05% 4 9.09% 1 15.63% 5

leucophaeus
21 Orthotomus Common LC 23.81% 5 0.00% 0 15.63% 5

sutorius Tailorbird
22 Acridotheres Crested Myna LC 0.00% 0 45.45% 5 15.63% 5

cristatellus
23 Columba liva Rock Pigeon LC 9.52% 2 18.18% 2 12.50% 4
24 Spilornis cheela Crested LC 14.29% 3 9.09% 1 12.50% 4

Serpent-eagle
25 Hypsipetes Black Bulbul LC 0.00% 0 36.36% 4 12.50% 4

leucocephalus
26 Garrulax Masked LC 14.29% 3 9.09% 1 12.50% 4

perspicillatus Laughingthrush
27 Psilopogon Coppersmith LC 14.29% 3 0.00% 0 9.38% 3

haemacephalus Barbet
28 Lalage Black-winged LC 14.29% 3 0.00% 0 9.38% 3

melaschistos Cuckooshrike
29 Mixornis gularis Pin-striped Tit- LC 0.00% 0 27.27% 3 9.38% 3

babbler
30 Centropus Lesser Coucal LC 9.52% 2 0.00% 0 6.25% 2

bengalensis

Survey
31 Cacomantis Plaintive LC 9.52% 2 0.00% 0 6.25% 2

merulinus Cuckoo
32 Amaurornis White-breasted LC 9.52% 2 0.00% 0 6.25% 2

phoenicurus Waterhen
33 Halcyon White-breasted LC 4.76% 1 9.09% 1 6.25% 2

smyrnensis Kingfisher
34 Psilopogon Green-eared LC 0.00% 0 18.18% 2 6.25% 2

faiostrictus Barbet
35 Pericrocotus Scarlet Minivet LC 9.52% 2 0.00% 0 6.25% 2

flammeus
36 Crypsirina temia Racquet-tailed LC 4.76% 1 9.09% 1 6.25% 2

Treepie
37 Corvus Large-billed LC 0.00% 0 18.18% 2 6.25% 2

macrorhynchos Crow
38 Pycnonotus Stripe-throated LC 4.76% 1 9.09% 1 6.25% 2

finlaysoni Bulbul
39 Zosterops Swinhoe's LC 9.52% 2 0.00% 0 6.25% 2

simplex White-eye
40 Pellorneum Puff-throated LC 9.52% 2 0.00% 0 6.25% 2

ruficeps Babbler
41 Copsychus Oriental LC 9.52% 2 0.00% 0 6.25% 2

saularis Magpie-robin
42 Aethopyga Crimson LC 9.52% 2 0.00% 0 6.25% 2

siparaja Sunbird
43 Lonchura Scaly-breasted LC 4.76% 1 9.09% 1 6.25% 2

punctulata Munia
44 Streptopelia Red Turtle-dove LC 4.76% 1 0.00% 0 3.13% 1

tranquebarica
45 Phaenicophaeus Green-billed LC 4.76% 1 0.00% 0 3.13% 1

tristis Malkoha
46 Clamator Chestnut- LC 4.76% 1 0.00% 0 3.13% 1

coromandus winged Cuckoo
47 Bubulcus ibis Cattle Egret LC 0.00% 0 9.09% 1 3.13% 1
48 Egretta garzetta Little Egret LC 0.00% 0 9.09% 1 3.13% 1

Survey
49 Pernis Oriental Honey- LC 4.76% 1 0.00% 0 3.13% 1

ptilorhynchus buzzard
50 Ictinaetus Black Eagle LC 0.00% 0 9.09% 1 3.13% 1

malaiensis
51 Prinia rufescens Rufescent LC 4.76% 1 0.00% 0 3.13% 1

Prinia
52 Prinia inornata Plain Prinia LC 4.76% 1 0.00% 0 3.13% 1
53 Zosterops Indian White- LC 0.00% 0 9.09% 1 3.13% 1

palpebrosus eye
54 Eumyias Verditer LC 4.76% 1 0.00% 0 3.13% 1

thalassinus Flycatcher
55 Cinnyris Olive-backed LC 4.76% 1 0.00% 0 3.13% 1

jugularis Sunbird
Jacknife estimation (described in method section) indicates that 67 species occurrence in Lien Lap
project area (12 more species if further survey is carried out), this result reflex that our surveys have
conducted relative comprehensively. The accumulated curve below also shows that it is nearly
approached asymptotic.
Figure 7.37 Species Accumulation Curve of Birds at Lien Lap Project

Two seasonal surveys were analyzed separately, the results show an estimation by Jacknife is 57
species in first survey and 41 species in second survey while the actual results were 50 and 48
respectly.
7.11.13.2.2.2 Vantage Point

The methodology used for avian surveys followed standard survey methodologies, consistent with the
Scottish Natural Heritage Guidance (Scottish Natural Heritage, 2014). For the Lien Lap proposed wind
power project, two (2) VPs were chosen as follows:
 VP1: 16.62879° N; 106.70275° E; and
 VP2: 16.61791° N; 106.68056° E.
Figure 7.38 Locations of Two Vantage Points Used in First Survey 2020 Survey
Species considered prone to collision

A total of 30 species was recorded in second survey (Appendix T) while 35 recorded in first survey (27
species at VP1 and 11 species at VP2) (Table 7.31, Figure 7.39). None of those recorded species are
listed as species of conservation interest in accordance with the IUCN Red List or Vietnamese
regulation (such as “Decree No 6/2019 on regulation of endangered, rare, precious fauna and flora and
the implementation of the Convention on International Trade in Endangered Species”).
Since several typhoons occurred in the Central of Vietnam during October to November 2020, the
hazard weather has affected bird’s activities, therefore very few birds were observed especially from
October 5th to the end of second survey.
The most common species in the Project Area reported in this survey was the House Swift (Apus
nipalensis) [IUCN LC]. This species possibly inhabits forest areas. Generally, species diversity and
abundance of birds in VP1 point was greater than VP2. This can be explained by the different habitats.

The landscape surrounding VP1 is mixed plantation while surrounding VP2 is dominated by mono
plantation of Acacia.
Table 7.31 List of Bird Species Recorded during the Vantage Point Survey
No. Scientist Name Common Name Taxa English name IUCN VNRB
Red
List
1 Streptopelia Red Turtle-dove Columbidae Pigeons, Doves LC NL

tranquebarica
2 Spilornis cheela Crested Serpent-eagle Accipitridae Hawks, Eagles LC NL
3 Spilopelia chinensis Eastern Spotted Dove Columbidae Pigeons, Doves LC NL
4 Phaenicophaeus tristis Green-billed Malkoha Cuculidae Cuckoos LC NL
5 Pycnonotus finlaysoni Stripe-throated Bulbul Pycnonotidae Bulbuls LC NL
6 Pycnonotus aurigaster Sooty-headed Bulbul Pycnonotidae Bulbuls LC NL
7 Psilopogon lineatus Lineated Barbet Megalaimidae Asian Barbets LC NL
8 Psilopogon incognitus Moustached Barbet Megalaimidae Asian Barbets LC NL
9 Psilopogon Coppersmith Barbet Megalaimidae Asian Barbets LC NL

haemacephalus
10 Pernis ptilorhynchus Oriental Honey- Accipitridae Hawks, Eagles LC NL

buzzard
11 Pericrocotus flammeus Scarlet Minivet Campephagidae Cuckoo-shrikes LC NL
12 Orthotomus atrogularis Dark-necked Tailorbird Cisticolidae Cisticolas LC NL
13 Lanius schach Long-tailed Shrike Laniidae Shrikes LC NL
14 Lalage melaschistos Black-winged Campephagidae Cuckoo-shrikes LC NL

Cuckooshrike
15 Halcyon smyrnensis White-breasted Alcedinidae Kingfishers LC NL

Kingfisher
16 Garrulax perspicillatus Masked Leiotrichidae Laughingthrushes LC NL

Laughingthrush
17 Garrulax leucolophus White-crested Leiotrichidae Laughingthrushes LC NL

Laughingthrush
18 Eumyias thalassinus Verditer Flycatcher Muscicapidae Chats and Old LC NL

World flycatchers
19 Eudynamys Western Koel Cuculidae Cuckoos LC NL

scolopaceus
20 Dicrurus macrocercus Black Drongo Dicruridae Drongos LC NL
21 Dicrurus leucophaeus Ashy Drongo Dicruridae Drongos LC NL
22 Dicrurus hottentottus Hair-crested Drongo Dicruridae Drongos LC NL
23 Cypsiurus balasiensis Asian Palm-swift Apodidae Swifts LC NL
24 Cuculus micropterus Indian Cuckoo Cuculidae Cuckoos LC NL

No. Scientist Name Common Name Taxa English name IUCN VNRB
Red
List
25 Crypsirina temia Racquet-tailed Treepie Corvidae Crows and jays LC NL
26 Copsychus saularis Oriental Magpie-robin Muscicapidae Chats and Old LC NL

World flycatchers
27 Columba livia Rock Pigeon Columbidae Pigeons, Doves LC NL
28 Clamator coromandus Chestnut-winged Cuculidae Cuckoos LC NL

Cuckoo
29 Cinnyris jugularis Olive-backed Sunbird Nectariniidae Sunbirds LC NL
30 Centropus sinensis Greater Coucal Cuculidae Cuckoos LC NL
31 Centropus bengalensis Lesser Coucal Cuculidae Cuckoos LC NL
32 Cacomantis merulinus Plaintive Cuckoo Cuculidae Cuckoos LC NL
33 Artamus fuscus Ashy Woodswallow Artamidae Woodswallows LC NL
34 Ardeola bacchus Chinese Pond-heron Ardeidae Herons LC NL
35 Apus nipalensis House Swift Apodidae Swifts LC NL

Notes:
CR : Critically Endangered; EN : Endangered; VU : Vulnerable; NT: Near Threatened; DD : Data Deficient; NA : Not Assessed; LC:
Least Concern; NL: Not Listed
Comparision bird data between two surveys

2000
1779
1800
1600
1400
1200
1000
800 738
600
421
400
146
200
35 30
0
Number of species Number of records Total individual counted
First Survey Second Survey
Figure 7.39 Summary Data Records from VP Counts
Height of flights
The height of flights were observed in three bands including band 1 (<30m), band 2 (30-180m), band 3
(>180m). The proposed turbine height is 105m, the diameter is 150m (refer to Project Description), thus
the rotor swept zone (RSZ) is 30-180m. In order to assess the risk collision between birds and wind
turbines, the collision risks of birds employed the flights in band 2 will be considered higher in
comparison with band 1 and band 3.

The first surveys indicated a majority of recorded flight time was in band 1 (<30m) accounting for 52.3%
of total recorded times. While 47.6% of total flights was observed in band 2 or RSZ (30-180 m). One
flight occurred in band 3 (>180 m) by Crested Serpent-eagle (Spilornis cheela) [IUCN LC] for only 15
seconds. All recorded species during the first survey were Least Concern in the IUCN Red List and not
listed in Vietnam Red Data Book.
Most species flew under 30m, which were below the blade’s height in commercial windfarm turbines.
Of the 35 species observed during the VPs count, 24 of them were recorded at least one time flight in
Band 2 or RSZ (30-180 m). One species House Swift (Apus nipalensis) [IUCN LC], however, flew
repeatedly in Band 2 that totalled 6,255 seconds, which is equivalent to 75% of flight time recorded by
all species (8,325 seconds) in Band 2. The species that had flights in band 2 (30-180m) are listed as
Least Concern in IUCN Red List.
As the number of records were low in second survey, bird activities data were low significant for
statistical analysis. During second survey, a total of 4125 seconds were recorded. In which, 2,010
seconds were observed that birds flew below RSZ accounted for 49% whilst 2,055 seconds that birds
flew into RSZ (50%) and only 60 seconds that birds flew over RSZ (01%).
Figure 7.40 Comparison Bird Data between Two Surveys

Figure 7.41 Bird Activities Observed in Band 2 (30-180m) in VP1 (First Survey)


Dự án điện gió Liên Lập Quảng Trị

Uploaded by

Document Information

Copyright

Available Formats

Share this document

Share or Embed Document

Sharing Options

Did you find this document useful?

Is this content inappropriate?

Copyright:

Available Formats

Dự án điện gió Liên Lập Quảng Trị

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

Initial Environmental Examination

Viet Nam: Lotus Wind Power Project

The business of sustainability

Document title Initial Environmental and Social Examination Report

Project No. 0552758

Version Revision Author Reviewed by ERM approval to issue Comments

www.erm.com Version: Final 14 May 2021

Initial Environmental and Social Examination

www.erm.com Version: Final 14 May 2021

2. PROJECT DESCRIPTION ......................................................................................................... 37

3. ADMINISTRATIVE FRAMEWORK ............................................................................................ 68

www.erm.com Version: Final 14 May 2021

3.3.2 ADB Safeguard Policy Statement ............................................................................... 77

4. IMPACT ASSESSMENT METHODOLOGY............................................................................... 87

5. IESE SCREENING AND SCOPING ........................................................................................... 98

6. STAKEHOLDER ENGAGEMENT............................................................................................ 110

7. ENVIRONMENTAL BASELINE ............................................................................................... 122

www.erm.com Version: Final 14 May 2021

7.2 Climate and Meteorology ........................................................................................................... 122

8. SOCIO-ECONOMIC BASELINE .............................................................................................. 237

www.erm.com Version: Final 14 May 2021

8.3.1 Overview of Quang Tri Province ............................................................................... 250

www.erm.com Version: Final 14 May 2021

9. ENVIRONMENTAL IMPACT ASSESSMENT .......................................................................... 381

10. SOCIAL IMPACT ASSESSMENT............................................................................................ 520

www.erm.com Version: Final 14 May 2021

10.2 Impacts on Economic Displacement and Loss of Livelihoods.................................................... 524

www.erm.com Version: Final 14 May 2021

10.9.7 Gender Mainstreaming Category .............................................................................. 555

11. UNPLANNED EVENTS ............................................................................................................ 557

12. CUMULATIVE IMPACT ASSESSMENT.................................................................................. 577

13. ENVIRONMENTAL AND SOCIAL MANAGEMENT PLAN ..................................................... 601

www.erm.com Version: Final 14 May 2021

13.2.3 Training, Awareness and Competency ..................................................................... 607

REFERENCES .................................................................................................................................... 705

APPENDIX A WIND TURBINE DETAILED NOISE DATA

www.erm.com Version: Final 14 May 2021

Table 2.5 Locations of Project’s Wind Turbines ............................................................................................. 47

www.erm.com Version: Final 14 May 2021

www.erm.com Version: Final 14 May 2021

Table 8.33 Local Needs and Recommendations............................................................................................ 368

www.erm.com Version: Final 14 May 2021

www.erm.com Version: Final 14 May 2021

www.erm.com Version: Final 14 May 2021

Figure 2.6 35 kV Transmission Line in Lien Lap Wind Farm ........................................................................... 49

www.erm.com Version: Final 14 May 2021

Figure 7.23 Protected Areas Surrounding Project Area .................................................................................. 156

www.erm.com Version: Final 14 May 2021

www.erm.com Version: Final 14 May 2021

Figure 8.57 Snapshot of Huong Tan commune ............................................................................................... 301

www.erm.com Version: Final 14 May 2021

www.erm.com Version: Final 14 May 2021

Figure 9.39 Viewshed (20 km buffer) .............................................................................................................. 479

www.erm.com Version: Final 14 May 2021

Acronyms and Abbreviations

www.erm.com Version: Final 14 May 2021

OHS Occupational Health and Safety

www.erm.com Version: Final 14 May 2021

Figure 0.1 Project Location

www.erm.com Version: Final 14 May 2021 Page 22

www.erm.com Version: Final 14 May 2021 Page 23

www.erm.com Version: Final 14 May 2021 Page 24

Key Impacts ADB Applicable Phase Significance of Impacts

Air quality SR 1 Construction Low risk / Medium risk Minor